Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR 420H User Manual

DVD Recorder  
DVR-420H  
DVR-520H  
DVR-720H  
®
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: No naked flame sources, such as  
lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus.  
If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fire  
spread over the apparatus then may cause fire.  
D3-4-2-1-7a_En  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property rights owned by  
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of  
this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and  
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Operating Environment  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
Do not install in the following locations  
• Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial  
light  
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure  
due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-  
term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a  
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for  
• Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly  
ventilated location  
D3-4-2-1-7c_En  
even during the warranty period.  
K041_En  
VENTILATION: When installing this unit, make  
sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation  
to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10  
cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side).  
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC  
corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC  
Corporation.  
WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are  
provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable  
operation of the product and to protect it from  
overheating, to prevent fire hazard, the openings  
should never be blocked and covered with items,  
such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also  
do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed,  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
sofa, or fabric having a thick pile.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_En  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel.  
The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must  
not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can  
result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the  
distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse.  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
appliance may not correspond with coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,  
proceed as follows ;  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected  
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or  
coloured black.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be  
connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter L or coloured red.  
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a  
three pin plug.  
IMPORTANT  
NOTE  
FOR USE IN THE UNITED  
KINGDOM  
After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in  
the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which  
corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base  
of the plug or the word that is embossed on the  
base of the plug, and the appliance must not be  
used without a fuse cover. If lost replacement fuse  
covers can be obtained from your dealer.  
Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T.A to  
B.S.1362 should be used.  
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in  
accordance with the following code:  
Blue  
: Neutral  
Brown : Live  
If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket  
outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug  
fitted.  
D3-4-2-1-2-2_En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Switching DVD soundtracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
01 Before you start  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8  
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9  
About the internal hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
06 Recording  
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Recording time and picture quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 47  
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 56  
Recording from a DV camcorder  
02 Connecting up  
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Front panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13  
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 16  
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Plugging in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
(DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Recording from the DV output  
(DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 59  
Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
03 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
07 Copying and back-up  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Copying from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
HDD to DVD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Copying from DVD to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
DVD to HDD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Using disc back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
04 Getting started  
Switching on and setting up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and  
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
08 Editing  
05 Playback  
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and HDD  
content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Editing HDD groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 84  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents  
of a disc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
09 Disc History  
Using the Disc History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
15 Index  
10 The PhotoViewer  
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
11 The Disc Setup menu  
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
HDD Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Finalize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
Setting the picture quality for TV and external  
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 95  
Audio DRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
13 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Audio Out settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Recording settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Playback settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
14 Additional information  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 112  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Manual recording modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 120  
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Moving the recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
CBhaepfteor 1re you start  
Disc Navigator  
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way  
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For  
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail  
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator  
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD  
content.  
Features  
HDD  
HDD recording  
You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on  
the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR-  
420H/520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H.  
Disc History  
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in  
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep  
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or  
record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD  
players.  
The Disc History screen shows disc information,  
including how much free space remains for recording,  
for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder.  
Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is  
automatically updated with the latest information.  
Copy between HDD and DVD  
Home Menu  
You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable  
DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the  
high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video  
in under two minutes (when recorded in EP mode using  
a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 8x disc).  
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the  
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting  
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and  
editing a recording.  
You can also choose to copy material at a different  
recording quality from the original. For example, you  
might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality)  
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a  
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same  
disc.  
Cinema surround sound in your home  
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-  
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound  
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.  
Easy Timer Recording  
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from  
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to  
record and the recording quality, then graphically set the  
start and end times of the recording. That’s it!  
One Touch Copy  
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title  
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing  
a button.  
Program up to 32 timer recordings  
You can program the recorder to record up to 32  
VR mode  
HDD  
Chase play  
programs, up to a month in advance, using the  
Using chase play you can start watching a recording  
before the recording has finished. For example, you could  
set a timer recording for a program that you’re going to  
miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the  
recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead  
of you.  
®
*
VIDEO Plus+ system for easy programming if you  
want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or  
weekly recordings, too.  
This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,  
which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if  
the broadcast is not running to schedule.  
Simultaneous recording and playback  
®
*1  
is a registered trademark of Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
VR mode  
HDD  
Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in  
hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For  
example you can record a broadcast program to either a  
recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another  
recording you already made on the same DVD or on the  
HDD.  
The VIDEO Plus+ system is manufactured under  
license from Gemstar Development Corporation.  
One Touch Recording  
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately  
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the ì REC  
button, the recording time is extended by another 30  
minutes.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Optimized recording  
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD  
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality  
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc  
with the settings that you made.  
Video mode  
player  
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back  
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives  
compatible with DVD-Video playback .  
*
Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or  
other set top box  
*
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-  
With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to  
the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) inputs  
of this recorder, you can start and stop recording  
automatically according to the timer settings of the set  
top box.  
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs  
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s  
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-  
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD  
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback  
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs  
recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio  
When recording using one of the high quality record  
settings (FINE or MN32), the audio is recorded in  
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers  
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture  
quality.  
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.  
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback  
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and  
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.  
Picture quality adjustment features  
Disc Back-up  
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality  
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the  
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to  
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize  
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.  
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to  
back-up important material on DVD to another  
recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the  
HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.  
HDD  
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily  
Recovery Recording  
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct  
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the  
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc  
by title, chapter or time.  
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc  
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the  
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.  
HDD  
Auto Replace Recording  
Manual recording  
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV  
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.  
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one  
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete  
it later.  
In addition to the four preset recording quality modes  
(FINE, SP, LP and EP), the manual recording mode allows  
you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings,  
giving you precise control over the recording.  
Record to and from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/  
720H only)  
Note on copying:  
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/  
output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This  
makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD  
or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD  
content back to the camcorder if you need to.  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you  
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in  
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as  
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or  
consented to by the rightowners.  
VR mode  
Safe, non-destructive editing  
When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc  
(the Original content) is not touched. The edited version  
(the Play List content) just points to various parts of the  
Original content.  
VR mode  
HDD  
Chapter marking  
You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your  
recordings for easy editing.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
What’s in the box  
01  
Note  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as  
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:  
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the  
box when you open it.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.  
• Remote control  
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—  
although they may look similar, different batteries  
may have different voltages.  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2  
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)  
• RF antenna cable  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each  
battery match the indications in the battery  
compartment.  
• Power cable  
• These operating instructions  
• Warranty card  
• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to  
be used for a month or more.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
control  
1
Open the battery compartment cover on the  
back of the remote control.  
Using the remote control  
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote  
control:  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the  
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.  
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong  
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
2
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery  
compartment following the indications (,) inside  
the compartment.  
• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere  
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other  
equipment located close to this unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the  
operating range of the remote.  
• When the batteries run down or you change the  
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset  
codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control  
Set on page 99 and Setting up the remote to control  
your TV on page 112 to reset them.  
3
Close the cover.  
• Use within the operating range and angle, as shown.  
30  
30  
7m  
• You can control this recorder using the remote  
sensor of another Pioneer component using the  
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel  
connections on page 12 for more information.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD  
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want  
to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an  
older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1  
discs.  
Disc / content format playback  
compatibility  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder  
compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs.  
General disc compatibility  
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc  
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally  
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc  
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as  
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable  
format—see below for further compatibility information.  
Model  
Playable  
Yes1,2,3  
Yes1  
Recordable  
DVR-7000  
No  
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H  
No  
1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized  
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.  
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when  
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.  
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
DVD-Video  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
CD-R/RW compatibility  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
• Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super  
VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or  
JPEG files  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:  
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file  
systems are both compatible with this recorder.  
Fujicolor CD  
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and  
Video CD/Super VCD)  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only  
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.  
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD  
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super  
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two  
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the  
widescreen size.  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),  
Windows Media Audio (WMA)  
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz  
• Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
VIDEO  
CD  
Super Video CD (Super VCD)  
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec  
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be  
playable but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)  
DVD-R/RW compatibility  
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.  
Compatible media:  
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No  
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 122)  
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x  
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x  
Recording formats:  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for  
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do  
not use for other file types)  
• DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode)  
• DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-  
Video format (Video mode)  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these  
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these  
limits are playable)  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility  
Frequently asked questions  
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?  
The most important difference between DVD-R and  
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,  
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.  
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc  
approximately 1,000 times.  
®
The Windows Media logo printed on the box indicates  
For more information, see About DVD recording on  
page 45.  
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio  
content.  
• What’s VR mode?  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers  
to an audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by  
using Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, Windows  
Media Player for Windows XP, or Windows Media  
Player 9 Series.  
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode  
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible  
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video  
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are  
more compatible with other DVD players.  
®
®
®
®
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded  
*
in Video mode are playable in a regular DVD player,  
but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process fixes  
the contents of the disc to make them readable to  
other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.  
JPEG file compatibility  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*  
still image files  
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in  
some players.  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
This label indicates playback compatibility with  
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video  
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with  
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can  
only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device.  
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs  
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.  
• File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the  
recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other  
file types)  
*
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-  
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders  
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders  
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)  
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs  
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s  
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-  
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD  
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback  
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs  
recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
PC-created disc compatibility  
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be  
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application  
software used to create the disc. In these particular  
instances, check with the software publisher for more  
detailed information.  
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.  
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’  
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection  
system (see CPRM on page 46) on CPRM-compliant  
DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only  
be played on players that are specifically compatible  
with CPRM.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are  
not compatible with this recorder.  
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes  
for additional compatibility information.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of  
editing can I do?  
About the internal hard disk drive  
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD  
recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making  
a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when to play it. On  
playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the  
Play List.  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of  
equipment. Please use the recorder following the  
guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure.  
We recommend that you back up your important  
recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against  
accidental loss.  
Original  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Title 3  
• Do not move the recorder while it is on.  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3 Chapter 1  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid  
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden  
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to form inside  
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.  
• While the recorder is switched on, do not unplug  
from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from  
the breaker switch.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 1 Chapter 2  
Play List  
• Do not move the recorder immediately after  
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,  
please follow the steps below:  
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words  
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content  
and the edited version.  
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the  
display, wait at least two minutes.  
Original content refers to what’s actually recorded  
on the disc.  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
3 Move the recorder.  
Play List content refers to the edited version of the  
disc—how the Original content is to be played.  
• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on  
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be  
lost.  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an  
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD  
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems  
include playback unexpectedly freezing and  
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.  
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs  
of HDD failure.  
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will  
be possible. In this case it will be necessary to  
replace the HDD unit.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Chapter 2  
Connecting up  
Rear panel connections  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ANTENNA  
AC IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV 1 (RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
1
ANTENNA IN/OUT  
6
DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL  
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN jack. The  
signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for  
connection to your TV.  
For connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/  
DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with optical  
digital input.  
2
OUTPUT jacks  
7
AC IN – Power inlet  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for  
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.  
3
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector  
Front panel connections  
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for  
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART  
connector. The video output is switchable between video,  
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 102 for how  
to set this up.  
STANDBY/ON  
HDD  
DVD  
DV IN/OUT  
PULL-OPEN  
OPEN/CLOSE  
REC ONE TOUCH COPY  
DV IN/OUT  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides  
a second audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and  
standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog  
audio jacks.  
4
AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV  
connector  
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for  
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART  
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.  
See AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set this up.  
DV-520H/720H only: On the right side is the DV input/  
output i.LINK connector. This is for connection to a DV  
camcorder.  
5
CONTROL IN  
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of  
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT  
terminal and bearing the Pioneer mark. Connect the  
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the  
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
EPG download  
EPG download allows you to program a timer recording  
directly from the electronic program guide displayed on  
your TV.  
Extra features for use with  
compatible TVs  
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V  
Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA  
LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART  
cable (not supplied), the following functions are  
available:  
See the manual that came with your TV for more  
information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP  
and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP  
and LP recording modes on this recorder.  
• Direct TV recording  
TV auto power on  
• Channel preset download  
• Electronic Program Guide (EPG) download  
• TV auto power on  
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV  
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video  
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to  
use this feature.  
• System configuration  
System configuration  
Direct TV recording  
Basic settings, including language, country and TV  
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your  
TV to help set up this recorder for use.  
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program  
that you’re watching, without having to worry about  
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See  
Direct recording from TV on page 48 for more on this  
feature.  
Note  
• For further details and compatibility information, see  
also the manual that came with your TV.  
Channel preset download  
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of  
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and  
preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and  
setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting :  
Download from TV on page 100 for more on this feature.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Easy connections  
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other  
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.  
Important  
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see  
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.  
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.  
The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as  
well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 102 and AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set them up.  
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV  
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.  
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect  
it to the ANTENNA IN jack on this recorder and skip  
the next step.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to  
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the  
ANTENNA IN of this recorder.  
3
4
TV  
3
Use another RF antenna cable to connect the  
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input  
on your TV.  
AC IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
4
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VI
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
ODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the  
SCART AV connector on your TV.  
5
5
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/  
AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your VCR.  
2
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
Note  
• See the following page if you want to use one of the  
other kinds of audio/video connection.  
VCR  
ANTENNA  
IN  
Tip  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows  
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner  
in this recorder while watching a video playing on  
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in  
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power  
Save on page 98).  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Using other types of audio/video output  
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output  
jacks, as well as an S-video output.  
Using the supplied audio/video cable  
Using the S-video output  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
1
2
TV  
TV  
2
1
ANTENN
ANTENN
AC IN  
T  
AC IN  
T  
IN  
L
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
AUDIO  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input  
1
Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect  
on your TV.  
the S-VIDEO OUTPUT to an S-video input on your TV,  
monitor (or other equipment).  
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for  
the video connection.  
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the  
2
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the  
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.  
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the  
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up  
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs  
for correct stereo sound.  
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.  
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video  
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up  
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs  
for correct stereo sound.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver  
If you have a cable or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this  
page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next  
page.  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector  
on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/  
1
2
AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your satellite/cable  
box.  
TV  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
AC IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VI
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
ODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
Note  
• The diagram shows SCART video connections, but  
you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video  
connections.  
3
1
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
Tip  
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows  
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner  
in this recorder while watching a video playing on  
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in  
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power  
Save on page 98).  
Cable/Satellite box  
ANTENNA  
IN  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting an external decoder box (1)  
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this  
page.  
Important  
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.  
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off  
(in standby).  
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched  
on during recording.  
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
4
TV  
ANTENNA  
AC IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
ODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
3
2
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
Decoder  
VCR/Satellite receiver  
/Cable box  
ANTENNA  
IN  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV  
3
Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite  
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite  
receiver/cable box.  
receiver/cable box to the AV2/AUTO START REC  
(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder.  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your  
4
Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV  
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.  
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed  
instructions.  
AV connector to your TV.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting an external decoder box (2)  
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
2
Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector  
on your TV.  
This enables you to watch discs.  
3
Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/  
AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector  
to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.  
TV  
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
1
2
A  
AC IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
Note  
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VID
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
DER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
• In order to use this setup, you will need to make the  
following settings from the Initial Setup menu:  
– Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the  
Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 102).  
– From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the  
Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On  
(see Manual CH Setting on page 100).  
3
1
SCART AV  
CONNECTOR  
Decoder  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver  
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital  
optical output.  
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for  
compatibility with all discs and sources.  
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as  
shown here), or the S-video output.  
Important  
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver  
properly (see Audio Out settings on page 104).  
ANTENNA  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
TV  
4
1
VIDEO  
OUT  
A/V  
IN 1  
DIGITAL IN  
OPTICAL  
AV amp/  
receiver  
2
3
AA  
AC IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
AV 2/AUTO START REC  
(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
AV  
1
(RGB) - TV  
CONTROL DIGITAL OUT  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
Note  
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.  
• The diagram shows ordinary video connections,  
but you can alternatively use an AV connector or  
S-video connections, if they’re available.  
2
Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack  
on this recorder to an optical digital input on your  
AV amplifier/receiver.  
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround  
sound.  
Important  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’  
your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it  
directly to your TV.  
3
Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio  
and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver.  
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video  
output to a video input on your TV.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting up  
02  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
(DVR-520H/720H only)  
Connecting other AV sources  
Using the front panel DV IN/OUT jack, it is possible to  
connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW  
recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW  
discs to DVD-R/RW.  
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder  
DV IN/OUT  
Important  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is  
not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS  
video decks.  
1
2
DV IN/OUT  
Analog camcorder  
DV  
IN/OUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
DV  
IN/OUT  
VCR  
DV camcorder  
1
Connect a set of audio and video outputs on  
your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this  
recorder.  
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or  
camcorder.  
1
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV  
in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front  
panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder.  
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the  
video connection.  
• The front panel connections make convenient  
connections for a camcorder.  
Plugging in  
Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that  
everything is connected properly.  
2
Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your  
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this  
recorder.  
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR  
or camcorder.  
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the  
video connection.  
AC IN  
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2/AUTO START  
REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for  
audio/video input and output with just one SCART  
cable.  
1
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN  
inlet and the other end into a standard household  
power outlet.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
CChaoptnert3rols and displays  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
STANDBY/ON  
PULL-OPEN  
HDD  
DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
REC ONE TOUCH COPY  
DV IN/OUT  
15  
14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
Illustration shows DVR-520H  
1
STANDBY/ON  
9
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62)  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD.  
2
HDD  
Press to switch to the hard disk drive (HDD) for recording  
and playback. The button lights when HDD is selected.  
10 ì REC  
Press to start recording.  
3
DVD  
11 ꢀ  
Press to switch to DVD for recording and playback. The  
Press to stop recording.  
button lights when DVD is selected.  
12 ꢄ  
4
5
6
IR remote sensor (page 8)  
Disc tray  
Press to start or restart playback.  
13 ꢅ  
Press to stop playback.  
Front panel display  
See Display on page 22 for details.  
14 OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
7
DV IN/OUT jack (DVR-520H/720H only) (page 12,  
20, 56, 57, 59, 104, 117)  
Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder.  
15 Front panel inputs (page 12)  
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front  
panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting  
camcorders and other portable equipment.  
8
+/– (page 29, 31, 48)  
Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Display  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
12 13 14  
15  
11  
1
ꢀ / ꢁ  
10 Recording quality indicators (page 46)  
Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD  
(
FINE  
) and DVD (  
).  
Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best  
quality).  
2
PLAY / ì REC indicators  
Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback  
/ recording is paused.  
SP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP  
(standard play).  
3
ꢇ ꢄ  
(page 28)  
The ‘’ and ‘’ indicators light to indicate that the HDD  
or DVD is selected for recording/playback.  
LP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long  
play).  
4
PL (page 78, 84)  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is  
in Play List mode.  
EP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP  
(extended play).  
5
2 3 (page 99)  
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed,  
the remote control mode is 1).  
MN  
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN  
(manual recording level) mode.  
6
REM  
Lights when the character display is showing the  
remaining available recording time.  
11 Character display  
12  
(page 104)  
7
V
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast  
are recorded.  
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.  
8
R / RW  
13 VPS / PDC (page 49)  
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or  
DVD-RW.  
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a  
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.  
14 NTSC  
9
(page 49)  
Lights when playing NTSC format video.  
Lights when a timer recording has been set.  
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has  
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)  
15 OVER (page 104)  
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.  
AUTO (page 56)  
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and  
during Auto Start Recording.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
7
DVD playback functions  
AUDIO (page 29, 43, 44)  
Remote control  
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the  
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner  
audio.)  
1
2
4
6
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
OPEN/CLOSE  
3
SUBTITLE  
(page 43)  
Displays/changes the subtitles included in  
multilingual DVD-Video discs.  
HDD  
DVD  
5
7
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
TV/DVD  
8
9
ABC  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
ANGLE  
(page 44)  
INPUT  
SELECT  
GHI  
PQRS  
JKL  
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle  
scenes.  
11  
10  
TUV  
CHANNEL  
VIDEO Plus+  
CLEAR  
12  
15  
8
PLAY MODE (page 40)  
+
CLEAR  
13  
14  
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such  
as search, repeat and program play).  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
PLAY LIST  
MENU  
9
TV/DVD (page 29)  
ENTER  
16  
17  
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the  
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,  
in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s  
tuner (or an external input).  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
18  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
CM SKIP  
PAUSE  
STOP OK  
19  
10 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR  
CASE  
SELECTION  
PREV  
REC  
NEXT  
STEP/SLOW  
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;  
channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also  
be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.  
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC  
20  
ì
DISC  
HISTORY  
NAVI  
CHP  
MARK  
EASY  
TIMER  
MARK  
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.  
21  
23  
TV CONTROL  
CHANNEL  
DISPLAY  
INPUT  
SELECT  
22  
24  
11 INPUT SELECT (page 56)  
Press to change the input to use for recording.  
TV DIRECT  
REC  
VOLUME  
12 CHANNEL +/– (page 29)  
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
DVD RECORDER  
13 VIDEO Plus+ (page 52)  
Press, then use the number buttons to enter a  
PlusCode programming number for timer recording.  
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62)  
®
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing  
title to DVD or the HDD.  
14 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 36, 76) / TOP MENU  
(page 31)  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top  
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.  
2
Remote control indicator  
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a  
TV (page 112) and when setting the remote control mode  
(page 99).  
15 PLAY LIST (page 78, 84) / MENU (page 31)  
Press to switch between Original and Play List content on  
VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video  
disc is loaded.  
3
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
16 ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to  
select the currently highlighted option.  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
5
HDD (page 28)  
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or  
playback.  
17 HOME MENU (page 33)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can  
navigate all the functions of the recorder.  
6
DVD (page 28)  
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.  
18 RETURN  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or  
display.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
19 Playback controls (page 30)  
21 DISC HISTORY (page 89)  
Press to display summary information (disc name,  
recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable  
discs loaded.  
REV SCAN / FWD SCAN (page 38)  
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press  
again to change the speed.  
NAVI MARK (page 37)  
Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current  
title for use in the Disc Navigator screen.  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
PAUSE  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
CHP MARK (page 81)  
Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/  
recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
22 DISPLAY (page 33)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.  
CM BACK (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward  
through the audio or video playing.  
23 TV CONTROL (page 112)  
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.  
CM SKIP (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward  
through the audio or video playing.  
24 TV DIRECT REC (page 48)  
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set  
to.  
PREV / NEXT ꢎ  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/  
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu  
page.  
STEP/SLOW (page 39)  
During playback, press to start slow-motion  
playback; while paused, press to show the previous  
or next video frame.  
20 Recording controls (page 28)  
ì REC  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the  
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.  
STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
REC MODE (page 47)  
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode  
(picture quality).  
TIMER REC (page 51)  
Press to set a timer recording from the standard  
Timer Recording screen.  
EASY TIMER (page 50)  
Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer  
Recording screen.  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
1
Switch on your TV and set the video input to this  
recorder.  
Switching on and setting up  
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you  
can make several basic settings using the Setup  
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the  
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio  
output settings.  
2
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the remote  
control or the front panel to switch on.  
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should  
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup  
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the  
Initial Setup menu; see page 99).  
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly  
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting  
to use the recorder.  
• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using  
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will  
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen  
size and language information. (Check the manual  
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)  
STANDBY/ON  
3
Use the ꢂ/(cursor up/down) buttons to choose  
a language, then press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
Language  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
On S
Front
Powe
Remo
Setup
English  
français  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Español  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
4
Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup  
ENTER  
Navigator.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock
Inpu
On S
Fron
Pow
Complete this setup before you  
start using your recorder.  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Start  
Cancel  
Rem
Setup
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press ꢃ  
(cursor down) to select Cancel, then press ENTER to  
exit the Setup Navigator.  
5
Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or  
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press  
ENTER.  
DVD RECORDER  
Initial Setup  
Auto Channel Setting  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Inpu
On S
Fron
Pow
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Auto Scan  
Download from TV  
Do not set  
Rem
Setup
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the  
channels (because they have already been set up, for  
example).  
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number  
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the  
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if  
you connected this recorder to your TV using a  
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the  
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this  
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for  
more details).  
Initial Setup  
Auto Clock Setting  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
Date  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
Time  
Front
Powe
Pr 1  
Clock Set CH  
Remo
Setup
Start  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to  
choose your country, then press ENTER.  
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After  
you see that the time has been set, select Next to  
proceed.  
Initial Setup  
Country Selection  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
Setup
Country  
UK  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Initial Setup  
Auto Clock Setting  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
Date  
THU 01  
01  
2004  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
11 20  
Time  
Front
Powe
Pr 1  
Clock Set CH  
Remo
Setup
Start  
Next  
Auto-tuning channels  
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the  
channel presets.  
If the time could not be set automatically, press  
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
Tuning  
11/107  
Cancel  
Manual clock setting  
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time  
Downloading channels from your TV  
signals, you can set the clock manually.  
Use the Download from TV option to download all the  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to set  
your time zone.  
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative  
channels that your TV is tuned to.  
Downloading  
Pr 5  
to GMT.  
Cancel  
Initial Setup  
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock
Manual Clock Setting  
Input
1/2  
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press  
ENTER.  
England  
London  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
Time Zone  
Front
Powe
Remo
Off  
Summer Time  
Setup
Initial Setup  
Clock Setting  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Press (cursor down) then use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor  
left/right) buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for  
summer time, then press ENTER.  
Auto  
Manual  
Remo
Setup
Select On if you are currently using summer time.  
Auto clock setting  
Initial Setup  
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together  
with the program. This recorder can use these  
signals to set the clock automatically.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock
M
anual Clock Setting  
1/2  
Input
England  
London  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
Time Zone  
Front
Powe
On  
Summer Time  
Remo
Setup
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then  
press ENTER to make all the settings.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby  
Digital, Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only, then press  
ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
• Check the operating instructions that came with your  
AV amplifier/receiver if you’re not sure what it’s  
compatible with.  
Manual Clock Setting  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
2/2  
Input
On Sc
Date  
THU 01  
01  
00  
2004  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Time  
Front
00  
Powe
Remo
9
Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96  
kHz PCM digital audio?  
England  
London  
Time Zone  
Setup
On  
Summer Time  
Initial Setup  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change  
96kHz PCM Compatible  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
the value in the highlighted field.  
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Compatible  
Not Compatible  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to move  
from one field to another.  
RemoDon't Know  
Setup
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in  
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
Compatible, Not Compatible, or Don’t Know, then  
press ENTER.  
7
Select the TV screen type, ‘Standard (4:3)’ or  
‘Wide (16:9)’.  
• Check the operating instructions that came with your  
AV amplifier/receiver if you’re not sure.  
Initial Setup  
TV Screen Size  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
On S
Front
Powe
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
10 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select  
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.  
Wide (16:9)  
Standard (4:3)  
Remo
Setup
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock
Tuner  
Input
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then  
Setup is complete!  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On Sc
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!  
press ENTER.  
Front
Powe
Finish Setup  
Go Back  
Remo
Setup
8
Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/  
receiver for digital audio?  
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.  
Initial Setup  
AV Amp Digital Connect  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Remo
Setup
Other settings you can make  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Connected  
Not Connected  
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be  
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,  
however, that you may want to make a couple of  
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set  
up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
Connected, or Not Connected, then press ENTER.  
• Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip  
channels where there is no station, as well as  
manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on  
page 100.  
• If you select Not Connected, that completes the  
setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or  
select Go Back if you want to go back and start again.  
• VIDEO Plus+ channel setting – This setting lets you  
assign guide channels to ensure that the VIDEO  
Plus+ programming system works correctly. See Set  
VIDEO Plus+ CH on page 101.  
• Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/  
receiver is compatible with.  
Initial Setup  
• Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set  
up the supplied remote control to control many  
brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your  
TV on page 112.  
AV Amp Compatibility  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
Input
On Sc
Front
Powe
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital,DTS  
PCM only  
Remo
Setup
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
1
If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and  
this recorder.  
Press STANDBY/ON to switch on.  
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for  
playback and recording  
• Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this  
recorder.  
The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front  
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for  
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel  
display shows which is currently selected.  
2
Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record  
to a recordable DVD.  
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.  
3
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.  
4
Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the  
HDD  
DVD  
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the  
disc.  
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the  
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for  
recording.  
Making your first recording  
5
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV  
channel you want to record from.  
• You can also use the +/– buttons on the front panel if  
the recorder is stopped.  
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic  
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a  
recordable DVD.  
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.  
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6  
(Recording).  
• If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART  
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s  
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel  
your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on  
page 48 for detailed instructions.  
STANDBY/ON  
OPEN/CLOSE  
6
7
Press ì REC to start recording.  
HDD  
DVD  
• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)  
mode, which will give you around two hours of  
recording from a blank DVD disc.  
• You can pause recording by pressing PAUSE.  
Press ì REC or PAUSE again to restart recording.  
CHANNEL  
When you want to stop recording, press  
STOP REC.  
Playing back your recording  
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD  
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.  
PLAY  
Press PLAY to start playback.  
STOP  
If you want to stop playback before the end of the  
recording, press STOP.  
REC  
STOP REC  
ì
DVD RECORDER  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also  
select the language.  
Using the built-in TV tuner  
NICAM A  
Regular  
NICAM B  
Changing TV channels  
NICAM A+B  
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note  
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,  
recording or during recording standby.  
• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM  
bilingual broadcast.  
A (L)  
B (R)  
A + B (L+R)  
• When watching a recording made from an external  
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External  
Audio on page 103), you can switch the audio  
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).  
CHANNEL  
ENTER  
L
R
L+R  
CHANNEL +/– buttons on the remote  
Number buttons on the remote – For example, to  
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,  
press 3, 4, ENTER.  
Note  
• When recording to the HDD, or in Video mode, or in  
VR mode using the FINE/MN32 setting, only one  
channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this  
case, decide which language you want to record  
before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording  
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 104).  
+/– buttons on the front panel  
Note  
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.  
• You can’t change TV channels during playback or  
recording, or while in recording standby.  
Switching between TV and DVD  
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can  
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in  
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),  
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV  
mode’).  
Changing audio channels  
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or  
external input signal.  
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-  
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV  
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.  
AUDIO  
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV  
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.  
Press AUDIO to change the audio.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.  
TV/DVD  
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on  
page 103) is set to NICAM and you are watching a  
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM  
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.  
Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and  
NICAM  
DVD mode.  
Regular  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Basic playback  
04  
3
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.  
Load a disc.  
This section shows you how to use your recorder for  
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of  
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as  
repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter.  
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc  
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-  
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to  
play face down).  
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read  
the note on page 32.  
Important  
5
Press PLAY to start playback.  
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means  
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a  
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it  
is specified.  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc  
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate  
DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and  
ENTER for Video CD menus.  
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback  
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This  
is not a malfunction.  
• When playing video from the HDD, playback will  
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.  
• See the following sections for more details on playing  
specific kinds of discs.  
STANDBY/ON  
OPEN/CLOSE  
6
7
To stop playback, press STOP.  
When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject  
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.  
• To open/close the disc tray, press OPEN/CLOSE.  
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into  
standby.  
• Press STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into  
standby.  
ENTER  
PLAY  
STOP  
DVD RECORDER  
1
Press STANDBY/ON to switch on.  
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the  
correct video input.  
2
Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to  
play a DVD.  
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Playing DVD discs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.  
Playing from the HDD  
The table below shows the basic playback controls when  
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).  
PLAY  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
Press to start playback.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-  
back starts from the place last stopped.  
Playback automatically stops after the end  
of a title is reached.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from the same  
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP  
again to cancel the resume function.)  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
to increase the scanning speed.  
when paused.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
(You can also use the front panel +/but-  
tons to do this during playback.)  
to increase the scanning speed.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.  
(You can also use the front panel +/but-  
tons to do this during playback.)  
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a  
chapter number then press ENTER to skip  
directly to that chapter within the currently  
playing title.  
On some discs, you can also use the num-  
ber buttons to select numbered items in  
the disc menu.  
During playback, enter a title number then  
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
CLEAR  
VR mode only: During playback, enter a  
title number then press ENTER.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry  
and start again.  
ENTER  
BACK CM SKIP  
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips  
backward/forward progressively up to a  
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
BACK CM SKIP  
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips  
backward/forward progressively up to a  
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three  
minutes back.  
STEP/SLOW  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
STEP/SLOW  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame in either direction.  
Press to display the ‘top’ menu or menu of  
a DVD-Video disc (these are often the  
same).  
TOP MENU  
MENU  
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-  
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select  
items.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous level of a  
DVD-Video disc menu.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files.  
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs  
The table below shows the basic playback controls for  
Video CD/Super VCDs.  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)  
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you  
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you  
can select what to watch.  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from the place last  
stopped.  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
CD and MP3 only: Press to start scanning.  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
Press again to increase the scanning  
speed. (There are two scan speeds; the  
current scan speed is shown on-screen.)  
Video CD only: You can resume playback  
from the same point by pressing PLAY.  
(Press STOP again to cancel the resume  
function.)  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next track (or  
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (You can also  
use the front panel +/buttons to do this  
during playback.)  
PAUSE  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback  
when paused.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
to increase the scanning speed.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Press to skip to previous/next track. (You  
can also use the front panel +/buttons to  
do this during playback.)  
CLEAR  
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to  
display the previous/next page.  
ENTER  
During playback, enter a track number  
then press ENTER to skip directly to that  
track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and  
start again.  
Note  
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the  
recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/  
receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be  
output through the analog outputs. Also make sure  
that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button  
(see Switching audio channels on page 44).  
CLEAR  
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,  
use to select numbered menu items.  
ENTER  
BACK CM SKIP  
Video CD only: Each press skips backward/  
forward progressively up to a maximum of  
10 minutes forward or three minutes back.  
Note that this function doesn’t work when  
playing in PBC mode.  
• Scanning doesn’t work with WMA tracks.  
STEP/SLOW  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance a single  
frame (forward direction only).  
RETURN  
Press to display the disc menu of a Video  
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Note  
Note  
• When playing in PBC mode, some playback features,  
such as search, repeat and program play are not  
available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in  
non-PBC mode by pressing to start playback  
instead of PLAY.  
• Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out  
sometimes, indicating that they are not available at  
the present time. For example, the Photoviewer  
option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that  
contains JPEG image files.  
Using the Home Menu  
Displaying disc information on-  
screen  
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the  
features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display  
the Home Menu screen:  
You can display various on-screen information about the  
disc loaded or the HDD.  
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
HDD  
DVD  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
DV Record  
DVR-520H/720H screen  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER  
to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu,  
press HOME MENU.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
Home menu options  
Disc Setup (page 92)  
Timer Recording  
(page 49)  
1
Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the  
Disc Navigator (page 36, Initial Setup (page 97)  
page 76)  
on-screen information.  
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the  
status of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable disc).  
Copy (page 61)  
Video/Audio Adjust  
(page 94)  
Disc History (page 89)  
Play Mode (page 40)  
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after  
150 minutes.  
PhotoViewer (page 90)  
DV Record (DVR-520H/  
720H only) (page 57)  
2
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY  
repeatedly until it disappears.  
The example displays below are a guide only; actual  
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
5
Recording time remaining  
HDD and removable disc activity display  
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc  
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to  
switch between the two kinds of display.  
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in  
the current recording mode.  
6
Preset name and number  
The example displays below show high-speed copying  
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.  
Shows the preset name and preset number for the  
currently selected channel.  
7
Audio mode  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel  
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Hi-Speed Copy  
0h08m left  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
8
Copy control information  
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel  
program.  
9
Disc name  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
Shows the disc name.  
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD  
audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
10 Finalized  
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.  
11 TV/DVD mode  
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching  
Recording time  
between TV and DVD on page 29).  
Relative playback position  
Stop display 2  
Stop display 1  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Resume  
FINE (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
14:52 MON 15/11/2004  
Rem. 0h35m  
Titles  
Lock Disc  
: Original 99  
: On  
Play List 15  
Disc Name  
: Comedy shows  
DVD Mode  
TV Mode  
9 10  
11  
1
2
Date and time  
Number of titles/tracks on disc  
1
DVD-RW Original / Play List  
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback  
is currently set to Original or Play List.  
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play  
List titles are shown separately.  
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows  
Copy List.  
Play display 1  
2
Disc type and mode  
1
2
3
4
5
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),  
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR  
or Video).  
Play  
DVD-R Video Chapters 15  
Title Total 0. 11. 52  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
3
Recording mode and time  
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),  
and the total recording time of the disc.  
DVD Mode  
4
Resume  
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last  
place stopped.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
1
2
Number of chapters in title  
4
Remaining recording time available  
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current  
recording mode.  
Current title and chapter number  
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for  
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG  
disc, shows current folder and file.)  
5
Recording mode  
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),  
and the total recording time of the disc.  
3
Elapsed title time  
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track  
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)  
Note  
• When using the simultaneous play and record  
feature, the display shows information for playback  
only.  
4
5
Total running time of title  
Angle indicator  
Lights during multi-angle scenes.  
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback  
information is displayed.  
Play display 2  
• Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and  
audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an  
indication of picture/audio quality.  
1
2
3
4
5
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a  
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.  
Play  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21  
Chapter Total 0. 01. 52  
ꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌꢌ  
Hi-Speed Copy  
Title Name  
• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis  
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the  
displayed record setting.  
4.32Mbps  
: 21/11 Football match  
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are  
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This  
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV  
broadcasts versus DVD.  
1
Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,  
copy, disc back-up  
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in  
progress.  
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time  
display when the disc is paused.  
2
3
4
Elapsed chapter time  
Total running time of chapter  
Data transfer rate  
Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear  
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that  
the broadcast TV program contains copy control  
information.  
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.  
5
Copy protected material (!)  
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.  
Recording display  
1
2
3
4
ìRec  
DVD-R Video  
3
0. 00. 15  
22:00  
ABC Pr 1  
Stereo  
21:00  
FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem.  
0h35m  
Copy Once  
DVD Mode  
5
1
2
3
Current title number  
Elapsed recording time  
Timer recording start and stop times  
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is  
a timer recording.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
CPhlaapteyr b5 ack  
Introduction  
Using the Disc Navigator to browse  
the contents of a disc.  
Most of the features described in this chapter make use  
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/  
(cursor buttons) and ENTER. To go back one level  
from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember  
also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen  
shows which buttons do what.  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc  
and start playback.  
HDD  
DVD  
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the  
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3  
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some  
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following  
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which  
instructions you need for which kind of disc.  
DVD  
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced DVD or finalized  
Video mode DVD-R/RW  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
Video mode  
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)  
VR mode  
VR mode DVD-RW  
HDD  
HDD  
CD  
Audio CD  
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only  
discs  
Video CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
Super VCD  
DVD-Video  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD WMA/MP3  
WMA/MP3  
WMA or MP3 files  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’  
from the on-screen display.  
MP3  
MP3 files  
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/  
MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes  
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.  
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback  
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This  
is not a malfunction.  
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as  
making a program list, are not available in PBC  
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by  
pressing .  
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The  
PhotoViewer on page 90.  
DV Record  
DVR-520H/720H screen  
2
Select what you want to play.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to highlight items  
and ENTER to select.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc  
Navigator looks slightly different.  
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or  
the DVD drive.  
The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and  
the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter  
within a title.  
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’  
from the on-screen display.  
Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go  
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.  
Disc Navigator  
3
Select ‘Play’ from the menu options.  
Title (1-10)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Title 03  
Title 04  
Title 05  
Title 06  
Title 07  
Title 08  
Chapter (1-003)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
DVD  
Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the  
screen.  
Disc Navigator  
Video Mode  
DVD  
1
2
3
6
The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks.  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Play  
Erase  
4
5
Disc Navigator  
Ttl Name  
Lock  
Erase All  
Track (1-10)  
Track 01  
Track 02  
Track 03  
Track 04  
Track 05  
Track 06  
Track 07  
Track 08  
Total Time 0.58.25  
CD  
Undo  
1/1  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a  
title to play.  
5
Press ENTER to start playback.  
The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders  
and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder.  
Note  
Disc Navigator  
• It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when  
playing a Video CD in PBC mode.  
Folder (1-03)  
01.Rock  
02.Pop  
Track (1-004)  
001.Intro  
002.Escape  
WMA/MP3  
03.Dance  
003.Everything You Say  
004.What I Do  
• Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to  
use the time search mode. See Search Mode on  
page 40.  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
Changing the thumbnail picture for a title  
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and  
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area  
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done  
while the disc is stopped.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for  
each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI  
MARK button.  
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD  
PLAY  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc  
Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of  
this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play  
titles. See also Editing on page 76 for more on editing  
recordable discs.  
PAUSE  
STEP/SLOW  
NAVI  
MARK  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
1
Start playback of the title you want to change  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
the thumbnail for.  
1
During playback, use the number buttons to  
2
Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make  
input a track number.  
For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,  
then 4.  
the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title.  
• For greater control over the exact frame you want to  
use, you can use the PAUSE and/or slow-motion/  
frame advance/reverse controls (/).  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new track.  
Navigating discs and the HDD  
ALL  
During playback you can easily jump to another title,  
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on  
the remote.  
Scanning discs  
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or  
backward.  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
1
During playback, press or to start  
reverse or forward scanning.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
2
Press the same button repeatedly to increase the  
DVD-Video Video mode  
scanning speed.  
1
During playback use the number buttons to  
DVD  
HDD  
enter a chapter number within the current title.  
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24,  
press 2, then 4.  
Forward:  
SCAN 1 SCAN 2 SCAN 3 SCAN 4  
Reverse:  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
Reverse play SCAN 1 SCAN 2 SCAN 3  
SCAN 4  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new chapter.  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
MP3  
VR mode  
HDD  
Forward/Reverse:  
SCAN 1 SCAN 2  
1
During playback, use the number buttons to  
input a title number.  
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,  
3
To resume normal playback, press PLAY.  
then 4.  
Note  
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.  
• Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be  
smooth.  
2
Optionally: Press ENTER.  
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  
will jump to the new title.  
• Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs  
(analog output only).  
• Scanning is not possible with WMA files.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
• No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video  
discs.  
Note  
• The picture quality during slow motion playback is  
not as good as during normal playback and depends  
on the disc being played.  
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning  
DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on  
forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the  
optical digital output.*) No sound is output when  
using other scan speeds.  
* Except during chase playback and simultaneous  
recording/playback.  
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth  
as forward and may be better with some discs than  
others.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may  
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached  
on a DVD disc.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD,  
except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output  
from the optical digital output during forward  
SCAN 1).  
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may  
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached  
on a DVD disc.  
Frame advance/frame reverse  
DVD  
HDD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the  
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you  
can only use frame advance.  
Playing in slow motion  
DVD  
HDD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs  
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in  
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be  
played forwards in slow motion.  
PLAY  
PAUSE  
STEP/SLOW  
PLAY  
1
2
During playback, press PAUSE.  
STEP/SLOW  
Press or to back up or advance one frame.  
• Hold down or for continuous frame reverse/  
frame advance.  
1
Press or to start slow motion reverse or  
3
To resume normal playback, press PLAY.  
forward playback.  
2
Press the same button repeatedly to change the  
Note  
slow motion speed.  
• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not  
as good as frame advance.  
SLOW 1/16  
SLOW 1/2  
SLOW 1/8  
SLOW 1/4  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may  
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached  
on a DVD disc.  
3
To resume normal playback, press PLAY.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
Search Mode  
The Play Mode menu  
ALL  
ALL  
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a  
specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/  
track number.  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search  
functions, repeat and program play functions.  
1
2
3
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.  
Select one of the search options.  
Important  
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/  
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD  
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions,  
see the following sections.  
Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/  
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,  
minutes & seconds).  
Play Mode  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.01.00  
PLAY MODE  
Program  
CLEAR  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes  
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15  
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into  
the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0.  
ENTER  
PLAY  
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,  
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/  
down) buttons.  
4
Press ENTER.  
1
Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu  
screen.  
Tip  
• You can often select what you want to watch on a  
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP  
MENU to display the disc menu.  
Play Mode  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Program  
Note  
• When using time search, playback may occasionally  
start slightly before or after the time you input.  
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).  
• Time search doesn’t work with Super VCDs.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER  
A-B Repeat  
to navigate.  
DVD  
CD  
Video CD  
HDD  
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or  
PLAY MODE.  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points  
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is  
played over and over.  
Important  
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super  
VCD discs.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
1
During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the  
VR mode  
Play Mode menu.  
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat  
Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at  
the point you want the loop to start.  
DVD-Video Video mode  
HDD  
Play Mode  
• For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,  
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat  
Off).  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
A (Loop Start)  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Program  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat  
Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).  
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will  
automatically move down to B(Loop End).  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at  
WMA/MP3  
the point you want the loop to end.  
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and  
plays the loop round and round.  
• For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat  
Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).  
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from  
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be  
in the same title.  
3
To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’  
from the Repeat Play menu.  
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no  
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
4
To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the  
A-B Repeat menu.  
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play  
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is  
displayed.  
Note  
• If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of  
a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.  
Note  
• If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat  
Program to repeat the program list.  
• If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat  
with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled.  
Program play  
Repeat play  
DVD-Video  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD WMA/MP3  
ALL  
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/  
chapters/folders/tracks on a disc.  
There are various repeat play options, depending on the  
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for  
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together  
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the  
program list (see Program play below).  
1
Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.  
2
Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of  
program options.  
1
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.  
Select a repeat play mode.  
Play Mode  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Input/Edit Program  
Start Program Play  
Cancel Program Play  
Erase Program List  
Program  
Play Mode  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Repeat Disc  
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Program  
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the  
kind of disc loaded.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a  
list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD,  
Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of  
chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).  
4
Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.  
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/  
folders/tracks.  
5
To play the program list, press PLAY.  
3
Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the  
Program play remains active until you turn off program  
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject  
the disc or switch off the recorder.  
current step in the program list.  
For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter  
within a title to the program list.  
• To add a title, select the title.  
Tip  
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press  
• To save your program list and exit the program edit  
screen without starting playback, press HOME  
MENU or PLAY MODE.  
(cursor right)and select a chapter from the list.  
Program  
Step  
• You can change the program list by selecting Input/  
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.  
Title (1-38)  
Title 01  
Title 02  
Title 03  
Title 04  
Title 05  
Title 06  
Title 07  
Title 08  
Chapter (1-004)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
01. 01-003  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
• During program play, press to skip to the next  
program step.  
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program  
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is  
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program  
list.  
For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to  
the program list.  
Other Program play functions  
Program  
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can  
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the  
program list from the Play Mode menu.  
Step  
01. 04  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Track (1-12)  
Track 01  
Track 02  
Track 03  
Track 04  
Track 05  
Track 06  
Track 07  
Track 08  
Total Time 0.00.00  
1
Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the  
list of functions on the left.  
2
Select a program play function.  
Input/Edit Program – See above  
For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a  
track within a folder to the program list.  
Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved  
program list  
• To add a folder, select the folder.  
Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but  
does not erase the program list  
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press ꢅ  
(cursor right) and select a track from the list.  
Erase Program List – Erases the program list and  
turns off program play  
Program  
Step  
01. 01-003  
02.  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Folder (1-06)  
01. Pop  
02. Electronic  
03. Jazz  
04. Indie  
05. Rock  
Track (1-010)  
001. Track 01  
002. Track 02  
003. Track 03  
004. Track 04  
005. Track 05  
006. Track 06  
007. Track 07  
008. Track 08  
Note  
• When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters,  
chapters not included in the program list may be  
sometimes be played, depending on the disc.  
06. Classic  
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start  
playback of the program list then select Program  
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see  
Repeat play on page 41).  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/  
track, the step number automatically moves down one.  
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the  
step number where you want to insert another step,  
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move  
down one.  
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the  
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
Displaying and switching subtitles  
Switching DVD soundtracks  
DVD-Video  
DVD-Video  
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more  
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which  
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle  
language during playback.  
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more  
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can  
switch the soundtrack during playback.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack  
options.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle  
options.  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio  
soundtrack.  
CLEAR  
Audio : 1/2  
Dolby Digital 2/0CH  
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle  
option.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display.  
Subtitle: 1/2 English  
Note  
• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when  
switching soundtracks.  
• Some discs only allow you to change audio language  
The toucan lives in tropical forests  
from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.  
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio  
Language on page 105.  
2
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then  
CLEAR.  
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS  
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when  
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,  
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/  
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital  
output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on  
page 19 for connection details.  
Note  
• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle  
language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to  
access.  
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on  
page 106.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
05  
Switching audio channels  
Switching camera angles  
VR mode  
CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
DVD-Video  
For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you  
can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or  
both (L+R).  
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or  
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be  
marked with a  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch  
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right  
channel.  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon  
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are  
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see  
Angle Indicator on page 111).  
Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With  
these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks  
as well as individual channels in each.  
ANGLE  
AUDIO  
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.  
• The angle number is displayed on-screen.  
1
To display/switch the audio channel, press  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the  
new angle.  
AUDIO repeatedly.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-  
screen.  
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while  
repeat playback is active.  
VR mode  
Note  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left channel only  
• You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video  
disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access.  
R – Right channel only  
CD  
Video CD  
WMA/MP3  
Stereo – Stereo (default)  
1/L – Left channel only  
2/R – Right channel only  
Super VCD  
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)  
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel  
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel  
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo  
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel  
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel  
Note  
• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode  
disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital  
soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch  
the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby  
Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 104)  
or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch  
the audio channel.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
CRhaepcteor 6rding  
• The maximum number of titles that can be recorded  
on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99.  
About DVD recording  
• The maximum number of chapters recordable on a  
DVD-R/RW disc is 999.  
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW  
media. The main difference between the two is that DVD-  
R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be  
recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.  
• No more recording is possible on a disc that already  
contains the maximum number of chapters/titles.  
A further difference between the two disc types is that  
only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording,  
which offers much more comprehensive editing  
functions compared to Video mode recording.  
About HDD recording  
The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its  
compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which  
will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes  
below).  
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is  
basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc.  
You have the full choice of recording quality options,  
including the manual mode, and of course you can  
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.  
While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video  
mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR  
mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content  
is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc  
will be in the chosen recording mode.  
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can  
store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality  
recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the  
HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use  
these groups as you like—for example, you might have a  
group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for  
camcorder recordings.  
Important  
• You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/  
RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD  
recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs  
recorded on this recorder are not playable on other  
players/recorders.)  
Important  
• It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on  
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure  
that the Input Line System setting (page 98) matches  
the TV line system of the source you’re recording.  
• This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW  
discs.  
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure  
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the  
recorder.  
Note  
• The maximum number of titles that can be recorded  
on the HDD is 250.  
• Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect  
playback and/or recording performance. Please take  
proper care of your discs.  
• You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode)  
on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on  
the DVR-420H/ 520H, or up to 204 hours on the  
160GB DVR-720H.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,  
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line  
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and  
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also  
Input Line System on page 98.  
• The maximum number of chapters per title  
recordable on the HDD is 99.  
• No more recording is possible on the HDD after the  
maximum number of titles has been reached.  
Note  
• The maximum continuous recording time is six  
hours.  
• Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models,  
are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check  
the operating instructions for your player for VR  
mode compatibility information.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Recording time and picture quality  
Restrictions on video recording  
There are four preset recording quality modes:  
• You cannot record copy-protected video using this  
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video  
discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-  
protected material is encountered during a  
FINE – Highest quality setting, gives about one hour  
of recording time on a DVD disc.  
SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, sufficient for  
most applications, gives about two hours of  
recording time on a DVD.  
recording, recording will pause automatically and an  
error message will be displayed on-screen.  
• Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on  
the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below).  
LP (Long Play) – Slightly lower video quality, but  
doubles the recording time on a DVD to around four  
hours.  
• When recording a TV broadcast or through an  
external input, you can display copy control  
information on screen. (see Displaying disc  
information on-screen on page 33).  
EP (Extended Play) – Use when maximum recording  
time is most important; EP gives you around six  
hours of recording time on a DVD disc.  
In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different  
recording quality/time settings when manual recording  
mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 107), giving  
you precise control over the recording.  
CPRM  
CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system  
regarding the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast  
programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for  
Recordable Media.  
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,  
AUTO, which maximizes the recording quality for the  
space available on the disc loaded at the time of  
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality  
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.)  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that  
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you  
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD-  
RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on  
the HDD.  
In all except the FINE/MN32 modes, sound is recorded in  
two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE/  
MN32, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed  
Linear PCM format.  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that  
are specifically compatible with CPRM.  
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording  
in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the FINE/  
MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting  
(page 104) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to  
record before recording starts.  
Recording equipment and copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful  
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is  
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a  
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or  
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception  
or consented to by the rightowners.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,  
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line  
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and  
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also  
Input Line System on page 98.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other  
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
Note  
• Note that all recording times (both here and those  
shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is  
because of the way that the video is recorded; you  
may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on  
what you’re recording.  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Setting the picture quality/recording  
time  
Basic recording from the TV  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.  
Recording starts immediately and continues until the  
disc is full or you stop the recording.  
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set  
the picture quality/recording time. There are four  
standard settings available, which allow you to choose a  
balance between picture quality and recording time.  
It’s also possible to create a fifth, ‘manual’ setting for  
picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this,  
however, you will need to set the Manual Recording  
option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording  
on page 107).  
HDD  
DVD  
AUDIO  
REC MODE  
CHANNEL  
ENTER  
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording  
setting.  
FINE – Fine picture quality  
SP – Standard play  
LP – Long play  
PAUSE  
EP – Extended play  
REC  
STOP REC REC MODE  
MN – Manual (available only when manual recording  
is on)  
ì
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and  
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a  
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is  
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting  
(see On Screen Display on page 98) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
DVD RECORDER  
1
Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive  
or a recordable DVD respectively.  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if  
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder  
takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV  
channel to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel number:  
23 30  
PR 7  
Channel preset  
• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the  
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.  
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,  
press 2, 4 then ENTER)  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the +/–  
buttons on the front panel to select the channel  
number.  
Direct recording from TV  
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART  
cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can  
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV  
without having to worry about what channel preset the  
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with  
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this  
feature.  
3
Use the REC MODE button to set the picture  
quality/recording time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above  
for detailed instructions.  
4
Use the AUDIO button to select the audio  
channel to record.  
See Changing audio channels on page 29 for more on  
PAUSE  
this.  
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is  
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing  
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The  
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set  
to FINE/MN32, in which case you do need to select  
the audio channel before recording.  
REC  
STOP REC REC MODE  
ì
TV DIRECT  
REC  
5
Press ì REC to start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC  
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30  
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The  
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the  
front panel display. When the recording ends, the  
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other  
operation is being performed.  
1
2
If necessary, load a recordable disc.  
Set the picture quality/recording time using the  
REC MODE button.  
3
Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.  
If you want to set a recording time, press the ì REC  
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30  
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You  
can see the recording time on-screen and in the front  
panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder  
automatically switches into standby if no other operation  
is being performed.  
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.  
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press  
PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If  
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter  
is started after recording restarts)  
• To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.  
6
To stop the recording, press STOP REC.  
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you  
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing ꢀ  
STOP REC.  
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press  
PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If  
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter  
is started after recording restarts)  
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no  
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of  
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).  
4
To stop the recording, press STOP REC.  
• If you set the recording time in step 3, you can still  
stop the recording anytime by pressing STOP REC.  
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no  
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of  
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).  
Tip  
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop  
through function. During recording, press the front  
panel + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop  
through on), or to switch to SCART NORM (loop  
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through  
on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)  
or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is  
automatically reset to off after recording has  
finished.  
Tip  
• You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is  
in standby to switch on and immediately start  
recording.  
• Please note that you can’t record from another  
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART  
cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector  
using the TV Direct Recording feature.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Important  
Setting a timer recording  
• A timer recording can’t be set if:  
– Auto Start Recording is in progress.  
– There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be  
recorded.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
Using the timer recording features you can program up  
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer  
recording programs can be set to record just once, every  
day, or every week.  
• Timer recording will not start if:  
– The recorder is already recording.  
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.  
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording  
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the  
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the  
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if  
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if  
recording to HDD).  
• Timer recording will start when the operation  
preventing timer recording has finished.  
• If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support  
simultaneous playback and recording (see  
Simultaneous recording and playback on page 55) is  
playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,  
playback will automatically stop to allow the  
recording to start.  
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable  
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)  
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you  
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to  
automatically replace the previous timer recording with  
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the  
previous recording made on that timer program will be  
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have  
watched it yet or not.  
• The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel  
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is  
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)  
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not  
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that  
the HDD is not recordable).  
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc  
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set  
(see Optimized Rec on page 108 for more on this).  
• Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto  
Start Recording function (see Automatic recording  
from a satellite tuner on page 56). A timer recording  
will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start  
Recording will resume after the timer recording has  
finished.)  
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but  
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the  
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will  
• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording  
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording  
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use  
some functions.  
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.  
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video  
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery  
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that  
a timer recording catches the whole program even when  
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer  
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.  
• The maximum length for timer recordings made to  
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title is  
limited to six hours, recordings over six hours will be  
spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be  
a break in the recording of a few seconds between  
titles.  
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in  
your country/area. Check with the stations for  
compatibility.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets  
the best recording quality for the space available on  
the disc loaded at the time of recording.  
Easy Timer Recording  
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes  
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.  
HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets  
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank  
DVD disc.  
• Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want  
to record to the hard disk drive.  
HDD  
DVD  
3
Use ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to move the  
cursor to the recording start date and time on the  
grid.  
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at  
a time using the and buttons.  
CHANNEL  
Current time  
Recording start time  
Easy Timer Recording  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00  
RETURN  
13/12  
14/12  
15/12  
MON  
13/12 11:45 --:--  
+
CHANNEL  
Pr 7  
FINE  
HDD  
/
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
REC MODE  
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer  
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is  
a 15 minute interval.  
ì
EASY  
TIMER  
The darker area represents time that has already passed  
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time  
that’s available.  
4
Press ENTER to set the start time.  
DVD RECORDER  
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the  
screen.  
• You can go back and reset the start time if you need  
1
Press EASY TIMER.  
to by pressing RETURN.  
Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu  
(press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then  
Easy Timer Recording).  
5
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) to move the  
cursor to the recording end time on the grid.  
Easy Timer Recording  
Recording start time  
Recording end time  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00  
13/12  
14/12  
15/12  
Easy Timer Recording  
11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00  
13/12  
14/12  
15/12  
MON  
13/12  
9:30 --:--  
+
CHANNEL  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
/
Pr 7  
FINE  
HDD  
MON  
13/12 11:45  
13:45  
2
Set the TV channel and recording quality.  
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to set the channel you  
want to record.  
+
CHANNEL  
/
Pr 7  
REC MODE FINE  
HDD/DVD  
HDD  
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow  
stretches from the start time to the current cursor  
position, representing the length of the recording. A  
recording of up to six hours can be set.  
• Use the REC MODE button to set the recording  
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE, SP,  
LP, EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode  
is on).  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
6
7
Press ENTER to set the end time.  
• The amount of free space available on the HDD and  
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown  
towards the bottom of the screen.  
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or  
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.  
• You can check the timer recording details you just set  
from the main timer recording screen (see Standard  
timer recording below).  
• In the lower-right corner, the number of timer  
programs already set and the number that use VPS/  
PDC, is shown next to Tmr Pgms.  
• If there are more than eight timer programs already  
set, press NEXT to switch page (go back using  
the PREV button).  
Note  
• You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording.  
Use the standard or VIDEO Plus+ timer recording  
methods if you want to use VPS/PDC.  
• You can also clear a timer program before it’s started  
(before the recorder enters timer recording standby)  
by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR.  
2
Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer program,  
Standard timer recording  
then press ENTER.  
The timer recording screen you can see all the timer  
programs already set, clear programs and set up new  
ones.  
Timer Recording  
Date  
Start  
10  
Stop  
--  
CH  
Pr 7  
Rec Mode  
SP  
12/12 SUN  
00  
--  
CLEAR  
Rec to  
HDD  
Group  
VPS/PDC  
OFF  
GROUP 1  
Program Set  
Ttl Name Input  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
3
Enter the timer recording settings.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field;  
use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change the  
value.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or  
select a daily or weekly program.  
TIMER REC  
ì
Start – Set the recording start time.  
Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length  
of a timer recording is 24 hours for HDD recording or  
six hours for DVD).  
1
Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording  
screen.  
CH – Choose a channel (1–99, excluding skip  
channels), or one of the external inputs from which to  
record.  
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from  
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer  
Recording, then Timer Recording (View)).  
Mode – Select FINE, SP, LP, EP or AUTO (See  
Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If  
Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the  
MN setting.  
This screen shows all the timer programs currently set.  
Timer Recording  
Date  
MON 13/12  
EVERY TUE  
Start  
7:00  
:00  
Stop  
8:00  
10:00  
New Input  
CH  
Pr  
Pr  
Mode Rec to VPS/PDC  
3
5
FINE HDD  
FINE HDD  
Off  
On  
Rec to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD  
9
for DVD recording. Select HDD  
for Auto Replace  
Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only).  
Group – Select a record group (for HDD recording  
only).  
HDD Remain  
DVD Remain  
10h20m(FINE)  
0h43m(FINE)  
1/1  
VPS/PDC – The VPS/PDC system automatically  
adjusts the recording time so that even if a program  
is not running to schedule you won’t miss it. For VPS/  
PDC to work properly, you must input the correct  
announced time and date of the program you want to  
record. Up to eight timer recordings can be set with  
• Each row is for one timer recording program, with the  
date and time information, channel, recording mode,  
DVD or HDD and the VPS/PDC setting.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
®
VPS/PDC on.  
Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus+  
programming system  
Note that VPS/PDC may not work with every station  
and that Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/  
PDC is on.  
This system makes programming timer recordings very  
simple. Most TV guides publish PlusCode programming  
numbers with their program details. If you want to make  
a timer recording of a program, you just input the  
corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel  
settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell  
the recorder the recording mode, and whether it’s a  
once-only recording or a regular recording.  
Ttl Name Input – Optionally, you can enter a name  
for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight  
Program Set then press (cursor down) to access  
this option.)  
4
After entering all the timer recording  
information, highlight ‘Program set’ and press  
ENTER.  
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The  
timer program you just input appears in the list. The  
rightmost column shows various timer recording status  
messages:  
HDD  
DVD  
Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer  
recording standby.  
Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in  
progress.  
5
To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME  
VIDEO Plus+  
MENU.  
CLEAR  
Note  
ENTER  
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see  
Optimized Rec on page 108) is set to On (and VPS/  
PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording  
quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the  
recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1  
recording quality then the Recovery Recording  
feature will automatically make the recording to the  
HDD instead.  
HOME  
MENU  
REC MODE  
ì
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an  
Auto Replace Recording may not complete  
successfully.  
1
Press ‘VIDEO Plus+’ to display the VIDEO Plus+  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed  
copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to  
start, the new timer recording will not replace the old  
one. However, the next time the timer recording  
starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.  
program screen.  
You can also access this screen from the Home Menu  
(press HOME MENU, select Timer Recording, then  
VIDEO Plus+).  
• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you  
must switch the recorder into standby before the  
timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly.  
For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need  
to switch the recorder into standby.  
VIDEO Plus+  
0
9
PlusCode#  
Rec Mode  
Rec Times  
3 9 9 2 4  
to input  
REC MODE  
to change  
MN21  
to change level  
Once  
Daily  
Weekly  
to change  
HDD  
Off  
HDD DVD to change  
Rec to  
Tip  
to change  
VPS/PDC  
• Stations that use VPS/PDC typically include VPS/  
PDC information in the teletext TV guide pages.  
Please refer to these when setting your timer  
recording.  
• Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode  
programming number. (To clear the last digit  
entered, press CLEAR.)  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• Press REC MODE to select FINE, SP, LP, EP or AUTO  
(See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If  
Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the  
MN setting.  
Important  
• You can’t use this feature until you have set up the  
guide channels. See Set VIDEO Plus+ CH on  
page 101.  
• Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select the  
Once, Daily or Weekly recording option.  
• You can’t change the recording mode.  
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to  
record to a DVD.  
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer recordings.  
1
Press ’VIDEO Plus+’.  
• Use the and buttons to switch VPS/PDC On  
or Off.  
The front panel display shows the current recording  
mode and prompts you to enter the PlusCode  
programming number.  
2
After making the settings, press ENTER.  
The program details are shown at the bottom of the  
screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically  
exited.  
P LUS CODE  
2
Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode  
• If you haven’t set up the guide channels (or at least  
the guide channel for the PlusCode programming  
number that you entered), the recorder will prompt  
you to enter the channel number that the TV program  
is showing on.  
programming number.  
2 9 32 4  
• To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR.  
• Use the PREV ꢍ / NEXT button to switch VPS/  
PDC on/off. With VPS/PDC on, the front panel VPS/  
PDC indicator lights. (Note that a maximum of 8  
timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC on.)  
Tip  
• You can check the timer program settings by  
pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording  
screen.  
3
Press ENTER.  
The display shows the timer settings:  
Date Start time End time HDD and Recording  
channel.  
VIDEO Plus+ programming with the power  
off  
You can enter a PlusCode programming number when  
the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is  
always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD  
disc, you’ll need to switch on the power and use the full  
VIDEO Plus+ program screen.  
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that  
the PlusCode programming number is correct and  
that the guide channel is set (see Set VIDEO Plus+  
CH on page 101), then set the timer recording again.  
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it means that  
although you entered a valid PlusCode programming  
number, the program has already finished.  
VIDEO Plus+  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
PREV  
NEXT  
ì
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
2
Use the (cursor up) button to highlight the  
Extending a timer recording in progress  
You can extend a timer recording beyond the  
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be  
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.  
current timer recording (‘Recording’ is shown in the  
‘VPS/PDC’ column), then press ENTER.  
A screen showing details of the timer recording appears.  
From this screen, only the recording stop time can be  
changed.  
CLEAR  
Timer Recording  
ENTER  
Date  
13/12 SAT  
Start  
7
Stop  
8
CH  
Rec Mode  
FINE  
HOME  
MENU  
00  
00  
Pr 3  
Rec to  
HDD  
Group  
GROUP1  
VPS/PDC  
OFF  
Program Set  
Ttl Name Input  
PREV  
REC  
NEXT  
STOP REC  
TIMER REC  
3
Set a new Stop time for the timer recording.  
ì
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select the  
hour or minute field, then use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down)  
buttons to change the time.  
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks  
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for  
three seconds.  
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel  
4
Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the  
screen.  
1
Recording will continue until the new stop time is  
reached.  
display.  
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in  
progress  
2
Press ì REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30  
minute increments.  
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the  
program (but continue recording), or stop recording  
completely if you need to.  
Programming a new end time  
Note that it is only possible to program a new end time for  
a timer recording when VPS/PDC is off.  
1
During timer recording, press TIMER REC to  
display the Timer Recording screen.  
REC  
STOP REC  
ì
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from  
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer  
Recording, then Timer Recording (View)).  
Timer Recording  
1
During timer recording, press and hold ì REC for  
Date  
Start  
Stop  
CH  
Pr 3 FINE HDD  
Pr 5 FINE HDD  
Mode Rec to VPS/PDC  
three seconds.  
12/13 MON  
EVERY TUE  
7:00  
9:00  
8:00  
10:00  
New Input  
Recording  
On  
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator  
disappears); recording continues so that you can  
manually stop recording whenever you like.  
2
When you want to stop recording completely,  
press STOP REC.  
HDD Remain  
DVD Remain  
--h--m(FINE)  
0h43m(FINE)  
1/1  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Preventing use of the recorder before a  
timer recording (child lock)  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback  
You can make all the front panel and remote control  
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is  
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make  
sure that the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
VR mode  
HDD  
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a  
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the  
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For  
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of  
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start  
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the  
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.  
1
If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.  
2
Press and hold STOP on the front panel for  
three seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons  
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly  
displayed again.  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording  
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the  
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator  
screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD on page 37).  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold STOP on  
the front panel for three seconds until the display  
shows UNLOCK.  
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is  
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then  
press and hold ì REC for three seconds.  
Important  
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or  
Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature.  
• You may not be able to use this feature with a  
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another  
recorder.  
Timer recording FAQ  
During recording, press PLAY to start playback  
Frequently Asked Questions  
from the beginning of the current recording, or press  
DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play  
from there.  
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start  
recording!  
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as  
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.  
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not  
locked (see Lock Disc on page 92), and that there are  
fewer than 99/250 titles already on the DVD/HDD.  
• To stop playback, press STOP (recording will  
continue).  
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why  
not?  
• To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will  
continue).  
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.  
Note  
• What happens when two or more timer programs  
overlap?  
• You can’t start playback immediately after recording  
starts.  
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start  
time has priority. However, the recorder will start  
recording the program with the later start time after  
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have  
the same times (but different channels, for example),  
the program set most recently takes priority.  
• When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the  
recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning  
discs on page 38).  
• You can’t use this feature during Auto Start  
Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the  
AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display).  
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are  
programmed to start at the same time, then the  
program that actually starts first takes priority.  
• You can’t use simultaneous playback and recording  
while copying or backing up.  
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you  
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD  
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match  
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Input Line System on page 98). Also, during  
simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line  
system of the playback track/title changes then  
playback will automatically stop.  
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,  
Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them  
(see Audio In settings on page 103).  
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or  
stretched), adjust on the source component or your  
TV before recording.  
3
Set up the recorder.  
Recording from an external  
component  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See  
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47  
for detailed information.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to  
record to a DVD.  
You can record from an external component, such as a  
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s  
external inputs.  
4
Press ì REC when you’re ready to start  
recording.  
• DVR-520H/720H only: The recorder will only start  
recording from the DV IN/OUT jack if there is a valid  
signal. Recording will also pause if the signal is  
interrupted during recording.  
HDD  
DVD  
Note  
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,  
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on  
video recording on page 46 for more details.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CLEAR  
Automatic recording from a satellite  
ENTER  
tuner  
HDD  
If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top  
box connected to the AV2/L1 input, you can have the  
recorder start and stop recording automatically with the  
timer settings of the connected component. (If the other  
component doesn’t have a built-in timer, you’ll need to  
use it with an external timer unit.)  
REC MODE  
REC  
ì
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder  
starts recording when it detects a signal from the other  
component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops  
recording.  
1
Make sure that the component you want to  
record from is connected properly to the DVD  
recorder.  
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.  
Important  
• It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and  
start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear  
this in mind when setting the timer.  
2
Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of  
the external inputs to record from.  
There are two analog inputs and a DV digital input (DVR-  
520H/720H only). The current input is shown on-screen  
and in the front panel display:  
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if  
another timer recording is in progress.  
• Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start  
Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer  
recording is due to start. After the timer recording  
has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume.  
AV2/L1 – Input 1/Auto Start Rec  
L2 – Input 2 (front panel)  
DV – DV input/output (front panel) (DVR-520H/720H  
only)  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
1
Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other  
component), then switch it into standby (if  
necessary).  
Recording from a DV camcorder  
(DVR-520H/720H only)  
Check the manual that came with the receiver if you’re  
not sure how to do this.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
2
Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for ‘External  
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the  
DV IN/OUT jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using  
the recorder’s remote, you can control both the  
camcorder and this recorder.  
Audio’ and ‘Bilingual Recording’ are as you want  
them.  
See Audio In settings on page 103 for more on these  
settings.  
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the  
DV IN/OUT jack is setup (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H  
only) on page 104).  
3
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See  
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47  
for detailed information.  
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer Recording’,  
then ‘Auto Start Recording’.  
HDD  
DVD  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or  
‘No’ to switch off.  
6
Switch the recorder into standby.  
The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights.  
The recorder will automatically switch on and start  
recording when the other component comes on.  
Recording stops when the external component switches  
off.  
CLEAR  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press STANDBY/  
ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO  
indicator goes off.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has  
already started, press ì REC for three seconds, then  
STOP REC.  
REV SCAN  
PAUSE  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
STOP  
• When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto  
Start Recording, some functions, such as extending  
the timer recording and chase play, are not available.  
Press the front panel + button for three seconds to  
cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the  
timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off.  
STEP/SLOW  
REC MODE  
ì
Note  
Important  
• Auto Start Recordings are always on the HDD. Auto  
Start Recording to DVD is not possible.  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD format  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this  
recorder’s remote.  
• You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:  
• the recorder is recording or in timer recording  
standby.  
• If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,  
you cannot control the second unit from this one.  
• the HDD is not recordable.  
• You can’t control this unit remotely from a  
• the HDD already contains the maximum number  
of titles (250).  
component connected to the DV IN/OUT jack.  
• You can’t record date and time information from DV  
cassette.  
AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on  
page 102).  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or  
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will  
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is  
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, the recorder will  
stop recording and the camcorder should stop  
(depending on the camcorder).  
• Recording is automatically paused if the recorder  
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.  
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-  
protected signal.  
• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting  
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.  
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote  
control during recording.  
• For best results when recording from a DV  
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing  
the camcorder to the place you want to start  
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-  
pause.  
• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,  
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not  
be recorded. Use the pause button on your  
camcorder instead and recording will start  
immediately.  
1
Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to  
the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker  
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode  
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is  
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.  
2
Set up the recorder.  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See  
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47  
for detailed information.  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording  
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.  
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to  
record to DVD.  
Note  
• Depending on the connected camcorder, you may  
not be able to control it using the remote control  
supplied with this recorder.  
3
From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV  
audio input is setup as you require.  
See DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104 for more  
on this.  
• If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read  
correctly, the audio type will not switch  
automatically. You can switch the audio manually  
from the External Audio setting (page 103).  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External  
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want  
them (see Audio In settings on page 103).  
• See also DV-related messages on page 117 if you  
encounter an error while using the DV IN/OUT jack.  
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘DV Record’ from  
the menu.  
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder  
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
5
Select ‘Record to HDD’ or ‘Record to DVD’ to  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!  
record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD  
respectively.  
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also  
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not  
copy-protected.  
6
Find the place on the camcorder tape that you  
want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point from which  
you want to record.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder  
then switch back on.  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this  
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the  
, , , , , and buttons.  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input  
(DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104) between Stereo  
1 and Stereo 2.  
7
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
‘Start Rec’ and press ENTER.  
Stop  
Stop  
1.02.22  
Control with these  
buttons  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
HDD SP (2h00m/DVD)  
Remain  
1h40m  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
Important  
Recording from the DV output  
(DVR-520H/720H only)  
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,  
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.  
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe  
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 93 for how to do  
this.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
You can record non-copy-protected material from the  
hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected  
to the DV IN/OUT jack.  
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on  
this recorder even after finalizing.  
1
Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
this recorder.  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before  
proceeding.  
2
3
4
5
Select the HDD or DVD for playback.  
2
3
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
Select ‘Finalize’.  
Find the place you want to start recording from.  
Start recording on the camcorder.  
Play the source material.  
Disc Setup  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Finalize  
Undo Finalize  
Next Screen  
Start  
Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players  
VR mode Video mode  
4
Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs  
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including  
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs  
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual  
that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it  
will play.  
‘Next Screen’.  
5
For Video mode discs only, select a title menu  
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to  
cancel.  
The menu you select will be the one that appears when  
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.  
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is  
created from which you can select titles when you play  
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title  
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.  
Finalize  
TITLE MENU  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,  
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then  
using the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) followed by  
ENTER to select titles and start playback.  
Finalizing a disc  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer  
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.  
These discs will have only a text title menu when  
finalized on this recorder.  
VR mode Video mode  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
6
The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.  
During finalization:  
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after  
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you  
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc  
Name on page 92 before starting the steps below.  
• If the finalization process is going to take more than  
around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel.  
Around four minutes before completion, the option to  
cancel disappears.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
06  
• How long finalization takes depends on the type of  
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the  
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR  
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc  
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.  
Note  
• By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW  
discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init.  
on page 108 if you want to change the default to  
Video mode.  
• If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD  
recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or  
initialize it for Video mode recording.  
Note  
• If the TV line system of the disc is different to the  
current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to  
finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 98 for  
how to change the recorder’s setting.  
Initializing a DVD-RW disc  
DVD-RW  
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will  
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also  
manually initialize DVD-RW discs.  
You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording  
or VR mode recording.  
Important  
• Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it.  
Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want  
to keep!  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different  
format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD  
recorder.  
1
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
Select ‘Initialize’.  
Disc Setup  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
VR Mode  
Video Mode  
Start  
Start  
3
Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the  
initialize options.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.  
Initializing Disc  
Pr 1  
1 min left  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
CChaoptpery7 ing and back-up  
that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed  
possible.  
Introduction  
When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying  
depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc  
you’re using. The table at the bottom of the page shows  
the minimum copying time for one hour of material.  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to  
a DVD  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play  
in another player.  
Note  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.  
• Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.  
Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.  
The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch  
Copy feature. Using this you can simply copy the title  
that’s currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other  
way around.  
• There may be cases where even 2x/4x/8x compatible  
discs do not copy at full speed.  
• High-speed copying is not possible when using discs  
initialized on another recorder.  
For more complicated copying tasks you can make a  
Copy List which specifies precisely what needs to be  
copied. A Copy List is similar to a VR mode Play List in  
many ways, and you’ll find that the Copy List commands  
are similar to those available for editing a Play List.  
• The table below shows disc brands that have been  
tested for 8x speed writing compatibility with this  
recorder.  
Maker  
A message showing that copying has finished is  
displayed after copying. If the recorder is inactive and no  
button is pressed (remote or front panel) then the  
recorder will automatically go into standby after 20  
minutes.  
Sony  
That’s  
JVC  
Fujifilm  
TDK  
Maxell  
Verbatim  
Ritek  
High-speed copying  
Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital  
process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the  
audio or video. This means that you can transfer back  
and forth without having to worry about the quality  
getting worse with each copy ‘generation’. It also means  
(As of April, 2004)  
DVD disc type  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x*3  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x*4  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x*2 DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x*3  
Rec mode  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1*1  
EP  
10 mins.  
5 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
4 mins.  
1.25 mins.  
2 mins.  
4 mins.  
8 mins.  
LP  
15 mins.  
30 mins.  
60 mins.  
SP  
7.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
FINE  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.  
*1 Compatible with single speed recording only  
*2 Compatible with 2x speed recording  
*3 Compatible with 4x speed recording  
*4 Compatible with 8x speed recording. Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Real-time copying  
Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage  
that you can manually set a different recording mode  
from the original. For example, you can record a title  
originally recorded in FINE mode in SP mode.  
One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD)  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing  
title (or currently selected title in the Disc Navigator) from  
the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start copying. The recorder copies  
at the maximum speed possible.  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode  
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not  
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at  
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting  
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108).  
For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable  
DVD-R/RW disc is loaded.  
* See also Copyright above.  
Frame accuracy and copying  
The Frame Accurate setting (see Frame Accurate on  
page 108) does not affect the actual video content on the  
HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether  
high-speed copying can be used.  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
HDD  
DVD  
When Frame Accurate is set to Off, high-speed copying  
can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List using  
a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However,  
copy-once protected material (see Restrictions on  
copying below) can’t be added to the Copy List, and the  
divide points in edited titles may be out by as much as 0.5  
seconds when compared to the original.  
During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to  
copy the current title to DVD.  
The front panel display indicates that the title is being  
copied. Playback continues while copying.  
When Frame Accurate is On, you can add copy-once  
protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in  
edited titles are maintained accurately. However,  
depending on the content of the Copy List and the disc, it  
may not be possible to use high-speed copying.  
Note  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail  
picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator,  
are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode  
DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are  
copied.  
Restrictions on copying  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly  
the same positions as the original when recording on  
to a Video mode disc.  
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means  
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely  
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode  
DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher  
(see CPRM on page 46 for more on this). Only one  
instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to  
the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased  
from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a  
locked title that is copy-once protected).  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a  
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be  
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-  
RW disc for this type of material.  
• Low resolution (EP or LP, or MN118) widescreen  
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a  
VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material.  
You can identify copy-once protected material during  
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the  
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 35).  
One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD)  
Copyright  
One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to  
the HDD in real time. You can copy the currently playing  
title or the currently selected title in the Disc Navigator.  
When you start copying, playback jumps back to the start  
of the title, then continues through to the end of the title,  
when recording automatically stops. The copy will be  
made in the recording mode (FINE, SP, etc.) that is  
currently set.  
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful  
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is  
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a  
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or  
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception  
or consented to by the rightowners.  
* See also Copyright above.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
• Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter  
markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their  
position in the copy may be slightly changed from the  
original.  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
• If some part of the title being copied is copy-  
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected  
portions will not be copied.  
HDD  
DVD  
During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to  
Canceling One Touch Copy  
copy the current title to HDD.  
Playback starts again from the beginning of the current  
title. The front panel display and an on-screen display  
indicate that the title is being copied.  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.  
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than  
a second.  
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is  
erased.  
Note  
• The maximum title length for copying is six hours.  
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied,  
except when copying from a finalized Video mode  
disc.  
Note  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space  
available for recording does not return to the pre-  
copy figure.  
Copying from HDD to DVD*  
Currently selected HDD title  
Title that cannot be  
added to Copy List  
HDD to DVD Copy  
HDD Groups  
All  
HDD  
1
2
3
4
Titles in the selected  
HDD Group  
HDD  
HDD  
1/3  
1/2  
16:00 Sun 8/11  
Recording Time  
Pr 5 LP  
0h32m55s  
Information for the  
selected title  
Copy List  
menu options  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
1
2
3
4
Copy List titles  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Running time of the  
Copy List  
Conf List  
From the HDD to DVD Copy screen you can build up a  
Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you  
can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you  
want them on your finished DVD.  
Important  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
• The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting  
is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see Frame  
Accurate on page 108), or if the Input Line System  
setting is changed (see Input Line System on  
page 98).  
* See also Copyright on page 62.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 112) will also erase the  
Copy List.  
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the  
PREV () and NEXT () buttons to display the  
previous/next page if there are more titles/chapters  
than will fit on the screen.  
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information  
about the title/chapter is shown in the central area of  
the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the  
information displayed.  
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on  
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List  
screen.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
• When selecting HDD titles, you can display titles  
from a particular HDD group by pressing (cursor  
up), then using the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons  
and ENTER to select a group. Press (cursor down)  
to get back to the HDD title thumbnail area.  
PREV  
NEXT  
DVD Copy  
All  
DISPLAY  
1
2
3
4
1
Make sure that there’s a recordable DVD disc  
loaded.  
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options  
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.  
Use the following commands when making an HDD to  
DVD Copy List:  
Add – Add titles from the HDD to the Copy List (see  
page 65).  
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
page 66).  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in  
the Copy List (see page 66).  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
DV Record  
Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see  
page 66).  
DVR-520H/720H screen  
Combine – Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy  
List into one (see page 67).  
3
Select ‘HDD DVD’.  
The HDD to DVD Copy List screen appears.  
Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List  
(see page 67).  
HDD to DVD Copy  
All  
Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see page 67).  
HDD  
1
2
3
4
HDD  
HDD  
Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 68).  
1/3  
1/1  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Edit chapters within a  
Copy List title (see page 68):  
Erase – Erase a chapter.  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
Copy List  
Total 0h00m  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
Combine – Combine two chapters into one.  
Move – Change the chapter order.  
Preview – Check the chapter content.  
Conf List  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight  
the command you want from the menu options on  
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require  
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from  
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢄ/  
(cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.  
Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a section of a title  
in the Copy List (see page 70).  
Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and  
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording  
the Copy List below).  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Recording the Copy List  
HDD to DVD Copy List commands  
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to  
record it.  
Add  
1
Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings  
Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.  
screen.  
1
Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
the Recording Mode.  
a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then  
press ENTER.  
HDD to DVD Copy  
HDD  
HDD to DVD Copy  
HDD  
DVD-RW VIDEO  
Required 0h08m  
High Speed  
All  
HDD  
Recording Mode  
1
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
Start  
1/3  
1/2  
16:00 Sun 11/8 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
1175MB  
2830MB  
/ 4700MB  
0h32m55s  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
1
2
3
Conf List  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the  
same recording quality as the original. (See page 61  
for more information on high-speed copying.)  
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the  
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the  
Copy List, the title is added at the end.  
FINE, SP, LP, EP, MN – The Copy List is copied at the  
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if  
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,  
the copy will not be better quality than the original.)  
3
Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,  
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu  
options.  
• If you select MN above, you can also change the level  
setting (MN1MN32) from the Recording Quality box  
that appears.  
Note  
Optimized – The recording quality automatically  
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space  
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-  
time.  
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame  
Accurate on page 108), the following limitations on  
adding titles to the Copy List apply:  
– When adding titles that contain copy-once  
protected material, the copy-once parts will not be  
added to the Copy List.  
– When adding titles that contain material of more  
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a  
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title.  
– Widescreen material recorded in LP, EP or MN118  
will not be added to the Copy List.  
– Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5  
seconds off compared to the original.  
When you change the recording mode setting, you can  
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more  
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able  
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording  
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List  
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.  
3
Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.  
Note  
• Only titles which were recorded in the same TV  
system as the recorder is currently set to can be  
added to the Copy List.  
• When the copy mode is set to something other than  
High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD,  
the chapter markers of the original are not copied.  
Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular  
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see  
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108).  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
Erase  
Use this command to erase individual titles from the  
Copy List.  
Input Title Name  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
_
&
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.  
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
/2  
/4  
´
HDD to DVD Copy  
OK  
Delete  
Space  
All  
HDD  
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
1/3  
1/2  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
select characters.  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
2
3
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/  
).  
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the  
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.  
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name on page 80.  
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the  
Copy List menu options.  
Title Name (Ttl Name)  
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy  
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).  
• Press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen  
without changing the name.  
4
To confirm the name and return to the main  
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Copy List menu  
Copy List screen, highlight ‘OK’ and press ENTER.  
options.  
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to name other titles in the  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy  
List menu options.  
a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then  
press ENTER.  
HDD to DVD Copy  
Divide  
All  
Use this command to make two titles from a title already  
in the Copy List.  
HDD  
1
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
1/3  
1/2  
15:00 Tue 6/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Copy List menu options.  
0h32m55s  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
1
2
3
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER.  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
HDD to DVD Copy  
All  
HDD  
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
1/3  
1/2  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
2
3
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
3
Use the playback controls to find the place you  
3
Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press  
want to divide the title.  
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.  
Divide Title  
Note  
HDD  
16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h32m55s  
Title  
2
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame  
Accurate on page 108), the following limitations apply  
when combining titles:  
– Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) can’t  
be combined.  
2-1  
0.08.13.26  
Play Pause  
Divide  
Back  
Divide  
– Mixed recording modes (EP/MN16, LP/MN718,  
SP/MN1931, FINE/MN32) can’t be combined.  
Preview  
You can use all the usual playback controls, including  
PLAY, PAUSE, scan (, ), and slow-motion  
(, ).  
Use this command to check the content of a title in the  
Copy List.  
• Press RETURN or highlight Back and press ENTER to  
go back to the main Copy List screen, leaving the title  
intact.  
1
Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu  
options.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide  
the title at the current playback position.  
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press  
ENTER.  
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the  
Copy List screen by pressing STOP, otherwise  
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.  
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to divide other titles in the  
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy  
List menu options.  
• During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for  
the Disc Navigator by pressing NAVI MARK.  
Note  
3
Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press  
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.  
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame  
Accurate on page 108), the divide points may move by  
up to half a second after selecting Divide.  
Move  
Use this command to change the order of titles in the  
Copy List.  
Combine  
Use this command to make a single title from two  
adjacent titles in the Copy List.  
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.  
1
Select ‘Combine’ from the Copy List menu  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
options.  
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
HDD to DVD Copy  
two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine,  
then press ENTER.  
All  
HDD  
1
1
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
1/3  
1/2  
HDD to DVD Copy  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
All  
Preview  
Move  
Erase All  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
HDD  
DVD  
DVD  
2
3
1
2
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
1/3  
1/2  
Conf List  
Add  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Divide  
Combine  
DVD  
DVD  
1
3
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the  
lower half of the screen.  
Conf List  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Copy List menu  
a new position for the title, then press ENTER.  
options.  
The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER.  
HDD to DVD Copy  
All  
HDD  
HDD to DVD Copy  
1
1
2
3
4
4
All  
HDD  
HDD  
HDD  
1
1
2
3
4
4
1/3  
1/2  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
HDD  
HDD  
Preview  
Move  
Erase All  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
1/3  
1/2  
DVD  
DVD  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
2
3
0h32m55s  
Preview  
Move  
DVD  
DVD  
2
3
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Erase All  
Chpt Edit  
Erase sec  
Conf List  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
Title to move  
Copy List insertion point  
The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of  
each chapter.  
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the  
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy  
List menu options.  
3
Select a command from the chapter edit menu  
options.  
Chapter Edit  
Erase All  
Use this command to erase the Copy List.  
HDD  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h32m55s  
Title  
Chapter  
---h--m  
2
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu  
options.  
Erase  
Divide  
Combine  
Move  
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
Preview  
Back  
1/1  
HDD to DVD Copy  
All  
1
HDD  
Chapter edit menu  
The following commands are available:  
2
2
3
4
4
HDD  
HDD  
1/3  
1/2  
Preview  
Move  
Erase All  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
Erase – Erase individual chapters: Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/  
(cursor buttons) and ENTER to select a chapter to  
erase. The chapter is erased after confirming.  
DVD  
DVD  
1
3
Copy List  
Erase all titles ?  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more new  
Yes  
No  
chapters: See Chapter Edit: Divide below.  
Combine – Combine two chapters into one: See  
Chapter Edit: Combine below.  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)  
Move – Change the order of the chapters: See  
Chapter Edit: Move below.  
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several  
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a  
Copy List title.  
Preview – Check the content of a chapter: Use the  
ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/(cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then  
press ENTER. Once the preview has started, press ꢅ  
STOP to return to the chapter edit screen.  
Editing chapters in a Copy List title does not change any  
actual content on the HDD. It affects only how the  
chapters appear after copying.  
4
Press RETURN to get back to the chapter editing  
options on the left, or select another chapter  
5
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to go back to the  
main Copy List screen.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Chapter Edit: Divide  
Chapter Edit: Combine  
You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as  
This command lets you combine two chapters into one.  
necessary.  
1
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
1
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
space between the chapters to combine.  
chapter to divide, then press ENTER.  
Chapter Edit  
2
Use the playback controls to find the place you  
want to divide the chapter.  
HDD  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h32m55s  
Title  
2
Chapter  
---h--m  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Divide Chapter  
Erase  
HDD  
Title 12:18 Wed 7/10  
Recording Time  
SP  
Chapter  
0h00m  
Divide  
Combine  
Move  
1
0h01m24s  
1-3  
Play Pause  
0.00.52.17  
Preview  
Back  
1/1  
Divide  
Back  
Divide  
2
Press ENTER to combine.  
Chapter Edit: Move  
This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a  
Copy List title.  
You can use all the usual playback controls, including  
PLAY, PAUSE, scan (, ), and slow-motion  
(, ).  
1
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
chapter you want to move, then press ENTER.  
3
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide  
the chapter at the current playback position.  
You can divide the chapter as many times as you want  
(up to 99 per title).  
Chapter Edit  
HDD  
Title  
2
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h32m55s  
Chapter  
0h05m  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
4
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the  
main Chapter Edit screen.  
Erase  
Divide  
Combine  
Move  
Note  
Preview  
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame  
Accurate on page 108), the divide point may move by  
up to half a second after selecting Divide.  
Back  
1/1  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a  
new position for the chapter, then press ENTER.  
Title to move  
Chapter Edit  
HDD  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h32m55s  
Title  
2
Chapter  
---h--m  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Erase  
Divide  
Combine  
Move  
Preview  
Back  
1/1  
Insertion point  
The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
6
Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to erase more  
Erase Section (Erase Sec)  
sections from the same title.  
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List  
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a  
recording made from the TV.  
7
Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the  
main Copy List screen.  
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Copy List menu  
options.  
Note  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame  
Accurate on page 108), the ‘From’ time and length of  
the erased section may differ by up to 0.5 seconds  
from that set.  
the title you want to erase a section from, then press  
ENTER.  
After selecting a title, a screen appears from which you  
can mark the start and end points of the section to erase.  
Erase Sec  
HDD  
16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP  
Title  
2
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
2-1  
Play Pause  
0.06.52.17  
A
B
Erase Sec  
Back  
From  
To  
3
Use the playback controls to find the start of the  
section to erase, then (with ‘From’ highlighted) press  
ENTER.  
You can use all the usual playback controls, including  
PLAY, PAUSE, scan (, ), and slow-motion  
(, ).  
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.  
Play Pause  
A
B
From  
0.02.09.17  
T
A
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to  
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the  
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself  
marked in red.  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Copying from DVD to HDD*  
Currently selected DVD title  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Original  
DVD  
1
2
3
4
4
DVD  
DVD  
1/3  
1/2  
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
Information for the  
selected title  
0h32m55s  
Copy List  
menu options  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
HDD  
HDD  
1
2
3
Copy List titles  
Preview  
Erase All  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Running time of the  
Copy List  
Conf List  
Use the DVD to HDD Copy screen to transfer video on  
DVD to the hard disk.  
* See also Copyright on page 62.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
Important  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen is not accessible when  
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you  
can still use the One Touch Copy function (see One  
Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62).  
PREV  
NEXT  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.  
• The copy list will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or  
edited.  
DISPLAY  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Original and Play  
List.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see  
Resetting the recorder on page 112).  
1
Load the recordable DVD disc that contains the  
material you want to copy to the HDD.  
2
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.  
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that  
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or PC.  
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
DV Record  
DVR-520H/720H screen  
• Note that the Copy option will not be available if the  
TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match.  
(See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change  
the TV system of the recorder.)  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
3
Select ‘DVD HDD’.  
The DVD to HDD Copy screen appears.  
Recording the Copy List  
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to  
record it.  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Original  
DVD  
1
2
3
4
1
Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings  
screen.  
DVD  
DVD  
1/3  
1/1  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
HDD  
HDD  
the Recording Mode.  
Preview  
Erase All  
Copy List  
Total 0h00m  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Original  
DVD  
Conf List  
DVD  
HDD  
Required 1h30m  
SP  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight  
the command you want from the menu options on  
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require  
you then to select a title or location from the  
thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢄ/ꢅ  
(cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.  
Recording Mode  
Start  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
Preview  
Erase All  
Copy List Total  
Current HDD Remain  
1h30m  
30h00m  
/ 34h00m  
Conf List  
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the  
PREV () and NEXT () buttons to display the  
previous/next page if there are more titles than will fit  
on the screen.  
High-Speed Copy – Only available when copying  
Original content from a VR mode disc. The Copy List  
is copied at the same recording quality as the  
original. (See page 61 for more information on high-  
speed copying.)  
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information  
about the title is shown in the central area of the  
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information  
displayed.  
FINE, SP, LP, EP, MN – The Copy List is copied at the  
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if  
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,  
the copy will not be better quality than the original.)  
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on  
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List  
screen.  
• If you select MN above, you can also change the level  
setting (MN1MN32) from the Recording Quality box  
that appears.  
When you change the recording mode setting, you can  
see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is  
more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t  
be able to start copying. In this case, either change the  
recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the  
Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the  
Copy List.  
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options  
Use the following commands when making a DVD to  
HDD Copy List:  
Add – Select and add titles to the Copy List (see  
page 73).  
Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List  
(see page 73).  
3
Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.  
Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 74).  
Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List  
(see page 74).  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see  
page 73).  
Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and  
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording  
the Copy List below).  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
Erase  
Use this command to erase individual titles from the  
Copy List.  
DVD to HDD Copy List commands  
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.  
Add  
Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.  
1
Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Play List  
DVD  
a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then  
press ENTER.  
1
1
2
3
4
4
DVD  
DVD  
1/3  
1/2  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Play List  
DVD  
0h32m55s  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
HDD  
HDD  
2
3
1
2
3
4
4
Preview  
Erase All  
DVD  
DVD  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
1/3  
1/2  
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
Conf List  
0h32m55s  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
HDD  
HDD  
1
2
3
Preview  
Erase All  
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the  
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from  
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the  
Copy List menu options.  
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the  
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the  
Copy List, the title is added at the end.  
Move  
3
Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,  
Use this command to change the order of titles currently  
in the Copy List.  
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu  
options.  
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.  
Note  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.  
• Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc  
or have already been copied real-time, and which  
contain bilingual audio or are recorded in recording  
modes MN12MN20 can be added to the Copy List,  
however if High-Speed Copy is selected they will not  
actually be copied.  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Play List  
DVD  
1
1
2
3
4
4
DVD  
DVD  
1/3  
1/2  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
• Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from  
the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but  
it will not be copied if High-Speed Copy is selected.  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
HDD  
HDD  
2
3
Preview  
Erase All  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
• You may not be able to copy titles when copying a  
disc that was created using a PC or another recorder.  
Conf List  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
Erase All  
Use this command to erase the Copy List.  
the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER.  
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu  
DVD to HDD Copy  
Play List  
DVD  
options.  
1
1
2
3
4
4
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
DVD  
DVD  
press ENTER.  
1/3  
1/2  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
0h32m55s  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
HDD  
HDD  
2
3
DVD to HDD Copy  
Play List  
DVD  
Preview  
Erase All  
Copy List  
Total 1h30m  
1
2
2
3
4
4
Conf List  
DVD  
DVD  
1/3  
1/2  
Add  
Erase  
Move  
Title to move  
Copy List insertion point  
HDD  
HDD  
1
3
Preview  
Erase All  
Copy List  
Erase all titles ?  
Total 1h30m  
Conf List  
Yes  
No  
The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the  
new order.  
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the  
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy  
List menu options.  
Using disc back-up*  
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy  
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to  
the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD  
disc.  
Preview  
Use this command to check the content of a title in the  
Copy List.  
* See also Copyright on page 62.  
1
Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu  
options.  
1
2
3
4
Press HOME MENU.  
Select ‘Copy’  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press  
ENTER.  
Select ‘Disc Back-up’.  
Select a back-up option.  
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the  
Copy List screen by pressing STOP, otherwise  
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.  
Disc Back-up  
3
Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press  
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing data  
Erase back-up data  
There are three back-up options:  
Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of  
a disc.  
Resume writing data – Record the back-up data  
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.  
Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the  
HDD.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and back-up  
07  
5
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and  
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE  
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,  
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are  
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order  
to make it usable again—see Initializing a DVD-RW  
disc on page 60.)  
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then  
close the disc tray.  
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video  
mode discs.  
Disc Back-up  
9
After the recorder has finished recording the  
No Disc.  
back-up disc, you can select whether to make  
another back-up of the same data or exit.  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
Start  
Cancel  
Disc Back-up  
Disc back-up finished.  
6
Select ‘Start’.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Start  
Cancel  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel  
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,  
return to step 6 above.  
Start  
Cancel  
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.  
10 If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on  
the HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to  
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE  
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.  
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).  
7
When the data has been copied, press OPEN/  
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and  
load a blank* recordable DVD.  
Disc Back-up  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be  
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be  
erased in the back-up process.  
Yes  
No  
Disc Back-up  
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,  
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD  
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc.  
Start  
Cancel  
Note  
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or  
Ver. 1.2 / 4x for the back-up.  
• It is not possible to play material on the HDD that has  
been backed-up from DVD.  
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot  
undo the finalization later.  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may  
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re  
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of disc.  
8
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data  
to the blank disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Start  
Cancel  
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
CEhdapitetri8ng  
Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs, as well as  
video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on  
whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD, or the HDD, and whether you’re editing Original  
content, or a Play List.  
With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and  
erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible.  
There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can  
create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesn’t actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how  
the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players).  
Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar  
commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles.  
The Disc Navigator screen  
DVD Disc Navigator  
Edit mode  
Currently selected title  
Disc Navigator  
Video Mode  
DVD  
1
2
3
6
Disc recording  
mode  
Locked title  
indicator  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
4
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
0h30m40s  
Disc Navigator  
menu options  
Play  
5
Erase  
Recording time  
available in the displayed  
recording mode  
Ttl Name  
Lock  
Erase All  
Undo  
1/1  
Number of title  
pages  
Information for  
selected title  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
HDD Disc Navigator  
Currently selected title  
HDD group tabs  
Disc Navigator  
Group1  
Group2  
Group3  
3
Group4  
All  
HDD  
1
2
NEW  
New indicator  
Recording time  
available in the displayed  
recording mode  
Selected Group  
Disc Navigator  
menu options  
All  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time  
HDD Remain  
6h12m(FINE)  
0h30m40s  
Play  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
4
5
6
Locked title  
indicator  
1/1  
Number of title  
pages  
Information for  
selected title  
Auto Replace  
Recording indicator  
Important  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input  
setting different to the current setting of the recorder  
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank  
thumbnail image. See also Input Line System on  
page 98.  
HDD  
DVD  
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator  
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a  
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input  
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.  
During recording, these titles cannot be played.  
CLEAR  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
PLAY LIST  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
PLAY  
PREV  
NEXT  
DISPLAY  
DVD RECORDER  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or  
• You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc  
Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons  
(front panel or remote).  
the DVD.  
2
Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc  
You can copy a selected HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to  
HDD by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY (see also page 62  
for more on One Touch Copy).  
Navigator screen.  
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.  
When editing HDD content, a row of group names  
appears above the title thumbnails (see Editing HDD  
groups on page 84 for more details). You can access  
these by pressing (cursor up) repeatedly until the All  
group is highlighted, then using the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/  
right) buttons to select a group. Press ENTER to ‘open’  
the highlighted group.  
Disc Navigator  
Original  
DVD  
1
4
2
5
3
6
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Play  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon are timer  
Undo  
1/1  
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Standard  
timer recording on page 51).  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc  
Navigator then press ENTER).  
Titles on the HDD marked with a  
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.  
icon are recently  
3
To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight  
the command you want from the menu options on  
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require  
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from  
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the ꢂ/  
ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do  
this.  
Remember  
• You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles  
using the NAVI MARK button—see Changing the  
thumbnail picture for a title on page 37.  
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the  
PREV () and NEXT () buttons to display the  
previous/next page if there are more than six titles/  
nine chapters.  
Disc Navigator menu options  
The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the  
VR mode and Video mode discs and the HDD are shown  
below.  
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information  
about the title is shown in the central area of the  
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information  
displayed.  
Video mode  
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to  
switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator  
screens.  
Play – Play a title (page 79)  
Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title  
(page 80)  
Playlist / Original indicator  
Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent  
accidental changes being made (page 82)  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
Erase – Erase a title (page 79)  
DVD  
1
2
5
3
6
Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)  
Undo – Undo the last change (page 83)  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Play  
Erase  
4
Ttl Name  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
VR mode  
(Original)  
Play – Play a title (page 79)  
1/1  
Undo  
Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title  
(page 80)  
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on  
the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc  
Navigator.  
Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent  
accidental changes being made (page 82)  
Erase – Erase a title (page 79)  
Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Undo – Undo the last change (page 83)  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to  
chapters in a title (page 81)  
Editing VR mode Original, Video  
mode and HDD content  
Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title  
(page 82)  
These commands affect the actual content stored on the  
DVD-R/RW or HDD.  
HDD  
Remember  
Play – Play a title (page 79)  
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST  
button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original  
screen.  
Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title  
(page 80)  
Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent  
accidental changes being made (page 82)  
Play  
Erase – Erase a title (page 79)  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes  
to chapters in a title (page 81)  
1
Divide – Divide a title into two (page 83)  
options.  
Change Group (Chg Group) – Assign a title to a  
group on the HDD (page 84)  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
title you want to play, then press ENTER or PLAY.  
Group Name (Grp Name) – Name or rename an  
HDD group (page 84)  
Disc Navigator  
Video Mode  
DVD  
Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase part of a title  
(page 82)  
1
2
3
6
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
VR mode  
(Play List)  
Play  
Erase  
4
5
Create – Make a new Play List title (page 87)  
Ttl Name  
Lock  
Erase All  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to  
chapters in a Play List title (page 86)  
Undo  
1/1  
Move – Move the position of a title in the Play List  
(page 87)  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
Erase All – Erase all titles in the Play List (page 88)  
Undo – Undo the last change (page 88)  
Play – Play a title (page 85)  
Erase  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
Erase – Erase a title from the Play List (page 85)  
The Erase title command does slightly different things  
depending on what you are currently editing. If you are  
editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on  
the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the  
available recording time will increase accordingly.  
Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in  
the Play List (page 85)  
Combine – Combine two Play List titles into one  
(page 88)  
Divide – Divide a Play List title into two (page 88)  
If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title  
will disappear from the list of titles, but the available  
recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a  
Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available  
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.  
Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title  
(page 86)  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
options.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
title you want to erase, then press ENTER.  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/  
).  
Disc Navigator  
Original  
DVD  
1
2
3
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name below.  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
4
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Play  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
Erase Title?  
Undo  
1/1  
No  
Yes  
4
Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the  
3
Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without  
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.  
press ENTER.  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to erase.  
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to name.  
Tip  
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name  
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts  
that you can use to input characters in the name input  
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the  
characters shown.  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when  
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing  
ENTER. (You can also use this method to erase titles  
when using the Play function, above.)  
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are  
both on the same button (for example a P and an R),  
press to advance the cursor one space manually  
between inputting the two characters.  
Title Name (Ttl Name)  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long  
for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for  
Video mode recordings.  
Key  
1
Characters  
Key  
6
Characters  
. , ’ ? ! – & 1  
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ  
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
a b c 2 ä à á â ã  
æ ç  
p q r s 7 $  
2
7
options.  
*1  
ÿ/ß  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
d e f 3 è é ë ê  
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡  
j k l 5 £  
t u v 8 ü ù û ú  
w x y z 9  
3
4
8
9
title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to  
the name input screen.  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
0
5
0
[cursor back]  
[change case]  
CLEAR  
[cursor forward]  
[clear character]  
Input Title Name  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
ꢍ/  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
<space>  
[finish name input]  
_
&
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
~
o
1
1
3
VIDEO  
Plus+  
2
3
¿
/
2
/
4
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # % ¥ | + =  
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
{ } [ ] < >  
*1  
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to  
select characters.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you  
want to play; press STOP to return to the chapter  
edit screen.  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)  
VR mode  
HDD  
When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you  
can edit individual chapters within a title, with  
commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can  
also play individual chapters to check their content.  
Undo – Undo the last command (only works with VR  
mode disc edits).  
3
Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on  
the left side of the screen.  
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
4
To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press  
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu  
options on the left.  
options.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
title that contains the chapters you want to edit,  
then press ENTER.  
Note  
• When editing VR mode Original content, it may not  
be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds  
long.  
Chapter Edit  
Original  
DVD  
Title  
1
Chapter  
0h03m  
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP  
2
1
4
7
3
6
9
• It may not always be possible to combine two  
chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter  
has been divided into three, then the middle chapter  
erased, it is not possible to combine the two  
remaining chapters into one.  
5
8
Erase  
Divide  
Combine  
Preview  
Undo  
Back  
1/1  
Inserting chapter markers into a title  
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear  
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items  
change to the chapter editing commands:  
VR mode  
HDD  
You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP  
MARK button while playing the title or during recording.  
This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content  
but also for editing purposes.  
Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want  
to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below).  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts:  
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the  
following screen use the playback controls (, ,  
, , etc.) to find the point at which you want to  
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press  
ENTER.  
PAUSE  
Divide Chapter  
Original  
CHP  
MARK  
DVD  
Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h01m24s  
Chapter  
0h00m  
1
1-3  
Play Pause  
0.00.52.17  
Divide  
Back  
1
Start playback of the title you want to create  
Divide  
new chapter markers in.  
You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator  
menu to do this.  
2
Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a  
new chapter to begin.  
A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to  
confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted:  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99  
chapters per HDD title). Highlight Back and press  
ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen.  
Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:  
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below)  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
• For greater control over the exact position of chapter  
markers it can be useful to use the PAUSE button  
and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse  
controls (ꢉ/ꢈ).  
3
Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
find the start of the section to erase, then (with  
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.  
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.  
Note  
• You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start  
Recording.  
Play Pause  
• If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder  
automatically starts a new chapter when you restart  
the recording.  
A
B
From  
0.02.09.17  
T
• When recording in Video mode, the recorder  
automatically puts chapter markers in at regular  
intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter  
markers manually after recording (see also Auto  
Chapter (Video) on page 108).  
A
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to  
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the  
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself  
marked in red.  
• The Play List and Original content on a disc can each  
contain up to 999 chapters.  
• Each HDD title can contain a maximum of 99  
chapters.  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
• Similar chapter editing commands are available for  
HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See  
also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not  
be able to erase very short sections (less than five  
seconds).  
Erase Section (Erase Sec)  
VR mode  
HDD  
6
Erase another section from the same title, or  
Using this command you can delete a part of an Original  
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a  
recording made from the TV.  
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator  
screen.  
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
Lock / Unlock  
options.  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
2
title.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased  
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock  
it later.  
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from  
which you can mark the start and end points of the  
section to erase.  
Important  
Erase Sec  
Original  
DVD  
• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the  
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock  
command using the Undo option from the Disc  
Navigator menu.  
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h01m24s  
Title  
1
1-1  
Play Pause  
0.00.52.17  
A
B
Erase Sec  
Back  
From  
To  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
1
Select ‘Lock’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
Undo  
options.  
VR mode Video mode  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally  
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,  
you can undo the last three edits you made).  
title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER.  
Disc Navigator  
Original  
DVD  
Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
1
2
3
options.  
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from  
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.  
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP  
4
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Lock  
Erase All  
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,  
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking  
titles.  
1/1  
Undo  
Divide  
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be  
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator  
with a padlock icon.  
HDD  
Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two.  
Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be  
recombined into one again.  
3
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock.  
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
options.  
Erase All  
2
Select the title that you want to divide, then  
VR mode Video mode  
HDD  
press ENTER.  
This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock  
/ Unlock on page 82).  
Divide Title  
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h01m24s  
HDD  
Title  
2
options.  
2-1  
Play Pause  
0.00.08.26  
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
Divide  
Back  
press ENTER.  
Divide  
Disc Navigator  
Original  
DVD  
1
2
3
3
Use the standard playback controls to find the  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Lock  
Erase All  
place you want to divide the title.  
4
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide  
the title at the current playback position.  
Erase all titles?  
Undo  
1/1  
No  
Yes  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the  
title.  
Select No if you want to cancel and leave the title intact.  
6
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to divide.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Group Name (Grp Name)  
Editing HDD groups  
HDD  
HDD  
Use this command to rename a group.  
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be  
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize  
your HDD video content there are four ‘groups’. You can  
move content from group to group, and rename the  
groups as you want.  
1
Select ‘Grp Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu.  
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
the group that you want to name or rename, then  
press ENTER.  
Input Group Name  
Group 1  
Change Group (Chg Group)  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
HDD  
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
Use this command to assign titles to a particular group.  
_
&
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
1
Select ‘Chg Group’ from the Disc Navigator  
menu, then press ENTER.  
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
/
2
/
4
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
2
Select the title that you want to put into a  
different group, then press ENTER.  
3
Input a name for the group.  
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
The name can be up to six characters long.  
a group for the title, then press ENTER.  
• You can select one of the four groups, or choose No  
Group, in which case it will only appear when All is  
selected.  
4
To finish entering the name, highlight ‘Exit’ and  
press ENTER.  
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another group to name.  
Disc Navigator  
HDD  
21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP  
Title 1  
No Group  
All  
Creating and editing a VR mode Play  
List  
GROUP1  
Lock  
Erase All  
Grp Name  
Chg Group  
GROUP2  
GROUP3  
GROUP4  
VR mode  
Divide  
A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual  
(Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of  
this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video  
content on the disc, and it allows greater control over  
editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you  
want it.  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to change the  
group of.  
Remember  
• Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List  
edit screen.  
• The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Play  
Title Name (Ttl Name)  
VR mode  
VR mode  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters  
long.  
1
Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
menu options.  
1
Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator Play  
List menu options.  
2
Select the title you want to play, then press  
ENTER.  
2
Select the title you want to name, then press  
ENTER.  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
3
Input a name for the selected title.  
1
2
3
Input Title Name  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
4
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
Play  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
_
&
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
Undo  
1/1  
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
/2  
/4  
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
Press ENTER after selecting each character.  
Erase  
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will  
already be in the name input section of the screen.  
Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
VR mode  
This command erases a title only from the Play List. The  
title remains in the Original content and the available  
recording time does not increase.  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/  
).  
1
Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
menu options.  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name on page 80.  
2
Select the title you want to erase, then press  
ENTER.  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
1
2
3
4
Highlight ‘OK’, then press ENTER to fix the name  
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP  
4
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Play  
Erase  
Ttl Name  
Chpt Edit  
Erase Sec  
and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without  
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.  
Erase Title?  
Undo  
1/1  
No  
Yes  
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to name.  
3
Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another title to erase.  
Note  
• The remaining recording time doesn’t change when  
you erase something from the Play List.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you  
want to play; press STOP to return to the chapter  
edit screen.  
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit)  
VR mode  
When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual  
chapters within a title, with commands for erasing,  
moving, combining and dividing. You can also play  
individual chapters to check their content.  
Undo – Undo the last command.  
3
Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on  
the left side of the screen.  
4
To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press  
1
Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator Play  
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu  
options on the left.  
List menu options.  
2
Select the title that contains the chapters you  
want to edit, then press ENTER.  
Erase Section (Erase Sec)  
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear  
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items  
change to the chapter editing commands:  
VR mode  
Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List  
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a  
recording made from the TV.  
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
DVD  
Title  
1
Chapter  
0h03m  
15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP  
2
1
Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu  
1
4
7
3
6
9
options.  
5
8
Erase  
2
title.  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a  
Divide  
Combine  
Move  
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from  
which you can mark the start and end points of the  
section to erase.  
Undo  
Back  
1/1  
Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want  
to erase and press ENTER.  
Erase Sec  
Play List  
DVD  
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h01m24s  
Title  
1
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts:  
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the  
following screen use the playback controls (, ,  
, , etc.) to find the point at which you want to  
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press  
ENTER.  
1-2  
Play Pause  
0.00.52.17  
A
B
Erase Sec  
Back  
From  
To  
Divide Chapter  
Play List  
DVD  
Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h01m24s  
Chapter  
0h00m  
1
3
Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
1-3  
Play Pause  
0.00.52.17  
find the start of the section to erase, then (with  
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.  
Divide  
Back  
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current  
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker  
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.  
Divide  
Play Pause  
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as  
you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight  
Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit  
screen.  
A
B
From  
0.02.09.17  
T
A
Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:  
Select the dividing line between two adjacent  
chapters and press ENTER.  
4
In the same way, find the end of the section to  
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the  
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself  
marked in red.  
Move – Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you  
want to move, press ENTER, then highlight the new  
location for it, then press ENTER again.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
4
Press ENTER to add the title.  
press ENTER.  
The new title appears in the updated Play List.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of  
video either side of the marked section to see how the  
edit will look.  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
1
2
3
6
Erase another section from the same title, or  
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator  
screen.  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
Divide  
Combine  
Erase All  
Create  
Undo  
1/1  
VR mode  
Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List.  
When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List  
(you can erase bits you don’t need later—see Chapter Edit  
(Chpt Edit) on page 86).  
5
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
menu options, or select another location for a new  
title.  
The title appears in the Play List complete with the  
chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if  
you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these  
are not automatically copied over into the Play List title.  
Move  
VR mode  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play  
List titles.  
You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List.  
1
Select ‘Create’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
1
Select ‘Move’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
menu options.  
menu options.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select the  
2
Select the title you want to move, then press  
insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER.  
ENTER.  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
DVD  
1
2
1
2
3
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP  
4
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
Divide  
Create  
Move  
Combine  
Erase All  
Divide  
Combine  
Erase All  
Undo  
1/1  
Undo  
1/1  
If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not  
apply.  
3
Select a new position in the Play List for the title,  
then press ENTER.  
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select an  
Original title to put into the Play List.  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
1
2
3
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
ORG1  
ORG2  
ORG3  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
4
Divide  
Combine  
Erase All  
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP  
ORG4  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
Divide  
Undo  
1/1  
Combine  
Erase All  
Undo  
1/1  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is  
displayed.  
menu options, or select another title to move.  
Disc Navigator  
Divide  
Play List  
DVD  
1
2
3
VR mode  
Use this command to split a title up into two new titles.  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
Divide  
Combine  
Erase All  
1
Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
menu options.  
2
Select the title that you want to divide, then  
1/1  
Undo  
press ENTER.  
3
Use the playback controls to find the place you  
3
Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator  
want to divide the title.  
menu options, or continue combining more titles.  
Divide Chapter  
Play List  
DVD  
Erase All  
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP  
Recording Time 0h01m24s  
Title  
1
1-1  
Play Pause  
0.00.08.26  
VR mode  
This command erases all the titles from the Play List.  
Divide  
Back  
Divide  
1
Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
menu options.  
2
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then  
press ENTER.  
You can use all the usual playback controls, including  
PLAY, PAUSE, scan (, ), and slow-motion  
(, ).  
Disc Navigator  
Play List  
DVD  
1
2
3
4
With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide  
the title at the current playback position.  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
4
5
To return to the Disc Navigator menu options,  
Divide  
Combine  
Erase All  
select ‘Back’ and press ENTER.  
Erase all titles?  
Undo  
1/1  
No  
Yes  
Combine  
VR mode  
Undo  
Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles  
into one.  
VR mode  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally  
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,  
you can undo the last three edits you made).  
1
Select ‘Combine’ from the Disc Navigator Play  
List menu options.  
2
Highlight the bar divider between the two titles  
Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator Play List  
you want to combine, then press ENTER.  
menu options.  
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from  
Disc Navigator  
the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.  
Play List  
DVD  
1
4
2
3
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,  
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking  
titles.  
DVD Remain  
0h37m(FINE)  
Create  
Move  
Divide  
Combine  
Erase All  
1/1  
Undo  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disc History  
09  
Chapter 9  
Disc History  
VR mode Video mode  
The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded.  
It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode  
and the lock status of the disc.  
Available  
recording space  
Disc name  
Disc History  
1/2  
LP  
Recording mode  
Disc Name  
News  
Sport  
Travel  
Movie  
Music  
DVD Remain  
Disc loaded  
1h54m  
2h35m  
1h22m  
0h30m  
1h38m  
Selected disc  
Recording time  
available  
Other discs  
Number of  
Title information  
for the selected  
disc  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Title 3  
Today's Football  
Enjoy Golf!  
Social dance Lesson  
Titles  
:
8
titles on disc  
DVD-RW VR  
System  
625  
Disc type and  
recording mode  
Recorded Line  
System of disc  
Disc lock indicator  
3
To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME  
MENU or DISC HISTORY.  
Using the Disc History  
1
Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History  
Note  
screen.  
• When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a  
DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder  
automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a  
number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you  
want to (see Input Disc Name on page 92).  
The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the  
list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc  
loaded, it is shown in the list with a ‘disc in’ icon.  
• The Disc History screen is also accessible from the  
Home Menu.  
• When you change the display for the available  
recording time using the REC MODE button, only the  
display is changed; the actual recording mode is not  
affected.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to see  
title information for other discs in the list.  
• To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you  
can’t remove the currently loaded disc).  
• The following discs appear in the Disc History list in  
gray:  
– Discs with no available recording space left  
– Locked discs  
• You can see the available recording time for different  
recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button.  
– Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or  
999 chapters  
– Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to  
the recorder’s current setting.  
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information  
for that disc disappears from the Disc History.  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
Chapter 10  
10  
The PhotoViewer  
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.  
Currently selected thumbnail  
PhotoViewer  
File  
Chair No. 2  
x
Date/Time 10:00 12/05/2003  
Size 1920 1440  
File information  
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
01. 12/12 TUE  
02. 13/12 WED  
03. 14/12 THU  
04. 15/12 FRI  
05. 16/12 SAT  
06. 17/12 SUN  
07. 18/12 MON  
08. 19/12 TUE  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
Pages in file  
view  
Pages in  
folder list  
1/2  
1/3  
Note  
Playing a slideshow  
• Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there  
are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still  
possible to view them all using the Reload function  
(see below).  
1
Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to  
display the PhotoViewer screen.  
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc  
containing JPEG files is loaded.  
• The time it takes for the recorder to load a file  
increases with large file sizes.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
a folder from the folder list.  
The first nine images from the selected folder are  
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.  
• Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV  
screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or  
either side (depending on the picture).  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that  
the disc and file formats are compatible with this  
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10).  
3
Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area.  
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.  
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN.  
4
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to select a  
Reloading files from a disc  
thumbnail.  
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or  
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload  
function.  
• Use the and buttons to display the previous/  
next page of thumbnails.  
5
Press ENTER or PLAY to start playing a  
1
Use the (cursor down) button to navigate to  
slideshow from the selected thumbnail.  
• Use the PREV / NEXT buttons to display the  
previous/next picture, or the PAUSE button to  
pause the slideshow.  
the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
2
Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999  
files/99 folders from the disc.  
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the  
images.  
6
Press STOP or RETURN to return to the  
thumbnail view area.  
7
To return to the folder view area, press RETURN.  
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
10  
Note  
• You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer  
screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you  
enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume  
reloading.)  
Zooming the screen  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion  
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move  
the area of the picture displayed.  
1
During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button  
to zoom the picture.  
2x Zoom  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and  
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.  
2
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) to move the  
zoomed area within the picture.  
Rotating the screen  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow  
so you can always view pictures the right way up,  
whichever way they were taken.  
During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the  
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.  
Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture  
in increments of 90º.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
11  
Chapter 11  
The Disc Setup menu  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the  
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,  
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu:  
2
Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long  
for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc.  
Input Disc Name  
DISC7  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.  
A B C D E F G H I  
J
K L M .  
,
)
I
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R S T U V WX Y Z  
(
I
ç
A A  
A
O
4
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
D
0
N
1
+
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
ß $  
_
&
~
}
/
@
¥
ˆ
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
¨
© –  
¬
®
˚
`
< < 14  
/
o
1
1
3
2
3
¿
¸
µ
/2  
/4  
´
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
OK  
Clear  
Space  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ/ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor buttons) and ENTER to  
DV Record  
select characters.  
DVR-520H/720H Screen  
• Use the ꢊ/ꢋ buttons to change the cursor  
position.  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-  
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (ꢍ/  
).  
Basic settings  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete  
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds  
to delete the whole name). For other remote control  
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name on page 80.  
Input Disc Name  
VR mode Video mode  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder  
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from  
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name  
function to change the default disc name to something  
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the  
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you  
will see only a limited character set.  
Note  
• You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line  
system of the disc is different to the current setting of  
the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for  
how to change the recorder’s setting.  
1
Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,  
then ‘Next Screen’.  
Disc Setup  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Next Screen  
Lock Disc  
VR mode  
• Default setting: Off  
Disc Setup  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
On  
Off  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or  
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc  
to make edits, select Off.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
11  
Important  
Finalize settings  
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will  
completely erase the disc).  
Finalize  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
Note  
• You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV  
line system of the disc is different to the current  
setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on  
page 98 for how to change the recorder’s setting.  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc  
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer  
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on  
page 59 for detailed instructions.  
Undo Finalize  
Initialize settings  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded  
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you  
want to record more material or edit material already on  
the disc.  
You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode  
recording or Video mode recording. The first time you  
load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically  
initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto  
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 108).  
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs  
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If  
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be  
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc using this  
recorder.  
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for  
example if you want to change the recording format of  
the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60 for  
detailed instructions.  
1
From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then  
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.  
HDD Initialize  
2
Select ‘Start’.  
HDD  
Note  
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem  
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.  
• You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize  
command if the TV line system of the disc is different  
to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line  
System on page 98 for how to change the recorder’s  
setting.  
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for  
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.  
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.  
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.  
Disc Setup  
Basic  
Initialize  
Start  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Initialize HDD  
• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
Chapter 12  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc  
playback, and for recording.  
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings.  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality  
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external  
input. There are several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
Choosing a preset  
Pr 5  
1
With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU  
Memory1  
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
Detailed Settings  
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
the picture quality setting you want to adjust.  
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
Pr 5  
Memory1  
3-D Y/C  
Motion  
Off  
Still  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
Off  
Off  
VNR  
DV Record  
Detail  
Max  
White AGC  
White Level  
Black Level  
Black Setup  
DVR-520H/720H screen  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
0 IRE  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to  
change the preset.  
You can adjust the following settings:  
Pr 5  
3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation  
(NTSC video only).  
Tuner  
Detailed Settings  
VNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied  
to the video signal.  
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.  
White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level  
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the  
adjustment.  
channel of the built-in TV tuner.  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
There are six presets available:  
Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts  
VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level (NTSC video only).  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours  
appear.  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for  
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or LDP).  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
4
Use the ꢄ/(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you can save your  
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.  
the currently selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
You can now use the preset for any other input or the  
built-in TV tuner.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of  
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).  
2
Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed  
Settings’.  
Tip  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
3
Select the picture quality setting you want to  
Note  
adjust.  
• DVR-520H/720H only: When the DV input is selected,  
only VNR and Detail settings can be adjusted.  
Memory1  
YNR  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Min  
Min  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
• When White AGC is On, the White Level setting  
can’t be adjusted.  
CNR  
QNR  
• The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to  
Detail  
NTSC video input.  
White Level  
Black Level  
Black Setup  
0 IRE  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
playback  
You can adjust the following settings:  
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the Y (brightness) component.  
This setting determines how the picture will look when  
playing discs.  
CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the C (colour) component.  
QNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)  
applied to the block noise.  
Choosing a preset  
1
With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.  
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black  
level (NTSC video only).  
change the setting.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and  
green.  
TV(CRT)  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours  
Detailed Settings  
appear.  
There are six presets available:  
4
Use the ꢄ/(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust  
the currently selected picture quality setting.  
TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs  
PDP – suitable for plasma display screens  
Professional – suitable for professional monitors  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
5
When you have all the settings as you want  
them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Tip  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different  
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you  
want to adjust.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for  
the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP or Professional).  
4
Press ENTER to select the preset.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video/Audio Adjust menu  
12  
Note  
• The Black Setup setting applies only when playing  
NTSC discs.  
Audio DRC  
• Default setting: Off  
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s  
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including  
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic  
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level  
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.  
1
During playback or when paused, press HOME  
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.  
2
3
Select ‘Audio Adjust’.  
Use the ꢄ/(cursor left/right) buttons to adjust  
DRC from ‘Off‘ to ‘Max’.  
Audio Adjust  
Audio DRC  
Off  
Max  
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the  
settings will depend on the material.  
Remember  
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via  
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to  
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range  
from your AV amplifier/receiver.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Chapter 13  
The Initial Setup menu  
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number  
that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the  
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various  
recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.  
Initial Setup  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock
Auto Clock Setting  
Input
Date  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
Time  
Front
Powe
Pr 1  
Clock Set CH  
Remo
Setu
Start  
Timer Recording  
Disc Navigator  
Copy  
Disc Setup  
Initial Setup  
Video/Audio Adjust  
Play Mode  
If the time could not be set automatically, press  
RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
Disc History  
PhotoViewer  
DV Record  
Manual clock setting  
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time  
DVR-520H/720H screen  
signals, you can set the clock manually:  
• Some settings can only be changed when the  
recorder is stopped. During playback these settings  
are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Set your time zone.  
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative  
to GMT.  
• Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are  
exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock
Manual Clock Setting  
1/2  
Tuner  
Input
England  
London  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
Time Zone  
Front
Powe
Basic settings  
Off  
Summer Time  
Remo
Setup
Clock Setting  
The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before  
you can use any of the timer recording features.  
Move the cursor down and select ‘On’ for  
summer time if you are currently on summer  
time, then press ENTER.  
The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast  
station transmitting clock signals, or manually.  
Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to  
Initial Setup  
display the clock setting screen.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock
Input
1/2  
Manual Clock Setting  
England  
London  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On S
Time Zone  
Initial Setup  
Front
Powe
On  
Summer Time  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Manual  
Remo
Tuner  
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Setu
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Auto clock setting  
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together  
with the program. This recorder can use these  
signals to set the clock automatically.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then  
press ENTER to make all the settings.  
On Screen Display  
• Default setting: On  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
Manual Clock Setting  
Clock
Basic  
Tuner  
2/2  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock Setting  
On  
Off  
Input
On Sc
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Date  
THU 01  
01  
00  
2004  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Time  
Front
00  
Powe
Remo
England  
London  
Time Zone  
Setup
On  
Summer Time  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change  
On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen  
operation displays (Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off  
to hide these displays.  
the value in the highlighted field.  
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to move  
from one field to another.  
Front Panel Display  
• Default setting: On  
Input Line System  
• Default setting: 625System  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
On  
Tuner  
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Off  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock Setting  
525System  
625System  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On the default setting, the time is shown in the front  
panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to  
Off to have the front panel display switch off completely  
when in standby.  
For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input  
line system to 625System. When recording an NTSC or  
PAL–60 signal through an external input, change to  
525System.  
Note  
Note  
• When set to Off, the display still lights dimly in  
standby when setting a timer recording, or during  
Auto Start Recording.  
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel  
preset, changing the input line system will usually  
also affect the input line system of the AV2/AUTO  
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if  
the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1  
In on page 102), then the L2 input is affected instead.  
Power Save  
• Default setting: Off  
• If when this setting is changed, the screen goes  
blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can  
switch back by pressing and holding the front panel  
+ button then pressing DVD (also front panel) while  
the recorder is stopped.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock Setting  
Mode1  
Mode2  
Off  
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
• When you switch the Line Input System setting the  
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the  
+ button and DVD buttons as described above, there  
is no confirmation, so please use with care.  
When set to Off, signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN  
terminal and at the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/  
DECODER) AV connector are passed through to the  
ANTENNA OUT terminal and to the AV1(RGB)-TV AV  
connector, respectively, when the recorder is in standby.  
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems  
on the same disc.  
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour  
System setting also changes (see Input Colour  
System on page 102).  
You can cut the standby power consumption of the  
recorder by turning off the through function for one or  
both terminals:  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Mode1 – Through function only for the antenna  
terminal  
Tuner settings  
Mode2 – No through function  
Off – Through function for both antenna terminal  
and AV connector  
Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan  
This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/  
G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the  
air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first  
use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into  
the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted  
channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip  
(described below).  
Note  
• When a timer recording is set with VPS/PDC on,  
SCART through is always active.  
Remote Control Set  
• Default setting: Recorder1  
1
Choose ‘Tuner’ from the Initial Setup menu, then  
‘Auto Channel Setting’, then ‘Auto Scan’.  
You only need to set this if you are using more than one  
Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Auto Channel Setting  
Manual CH Setting  
Channel Swapping  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
Auto Scan  
Download from TV  
Initial Setup  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Basic  
Tuner  
Clock Setting  
Recorder1  
Recorder2  
Recorder3  
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
2
Select your country then press ENTER to start  
tuning.  
So that each remote control operates only its own  
recorder, make this setting different for each recorder  
and remote in the room.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Auto Channel Setting  
AutoC
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Manu
Chann
Set VID
There are three different recorder IDs. When set to  
Recorder2 or Recorder3, the remote control mode is  
shown in the front panel display.  
Country  
UK  
After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the  
change by selecting Yes or No (use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor  
left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER.  
• You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by  
Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the  
remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote  
to the same ID.  
pressing ENTER again.  
After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping  
screen appears showing which channels have been  
assigned to which program numbers.  
To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number  
button (1, 2 or 3) until the indicator on the remote lights.  
Initial Setup  
Setup Navigator  
1/7  
Channel Mapping  
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
System  
CH Name  
Pr  
9
System  
CH Name  
• Default setting: n/a  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
26  
33  
23  
30  
37  
35  
39  
26  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
25  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
Start  
Tuner  
Input Line System  
On Screen Display  
Front Panel Display  
Power Save  
Remote Control Set  
Setup Navigator  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next  
page.  
3
Press HOME MENU to exit this screen.  
The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you  
switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting  
the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings  
menu should you need it at any other time.  
See also Switching on and setting up on page 25.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
1
Select ‘Manual CH Setting’, then ‘Next Screen’.  
Note  
• You can fine-tune individual stations using the  
Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting  
below for how to use this.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Auto Channel Setting  
Manual CH Setting  
Channel Swapping  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
Next Screen  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV  
If you connected this recorder to your TV using the  
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, and if your TV supports this  
function, you can download all the channels that your TV  
is tuned to. Check your TV’s instruction manual for more  
details.  
Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen.  
2
Select your country.  
1
2
3
Choose ‘Download from TV’.  
Initial Setup  
Manual Channel Setting  
Auto C
Basic  
Tuner  
Chann
Manua
Initial Setup  
Country  
UK  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Set VID
Basic  
Tuner  
Auto Channel Setting  
Manual CH Setting  
Channel Swapping  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
Auto Scan  
Download from TV  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
3
Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting  
screen.  
Select your country.  
Pr 1  
Skip  
Off  
UK & IE  
2
Initial Setup  
CH System  
Channel  
AFT  
Auto Channel Setting  
AutoCh
Basic  
Tuner  
Manua
Chann
Set VID
On  
Country  
UK  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Level  
Sound System  
Name  
I
Decoder  
Off  
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number  
buttons to change channels.  
Press ENTER to start downloading.  
From this screen there are eight parameters you can set:  
Downloading  
Pr 5  
Skip – If you want to skip the displayed channel  
(because there is no station assigned to that  
channel), change the Skip setting to On.  
Cancel  
CH System – Set the channel system used in your  
area or region.  
After downloading has finished, the channel mapping  
screen appears showing which channels have been  
assigned to which program numbers.  
Channel – Change the channel number assigned to  
the current preset.  
AFT (Auto Fine Tune) – When set to On, the station is  
automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune  
(see below).  
Tip  
• If the channel tuning information is updated in the  
TV, the recorder will automatically download the new  
information.  
Level – Set the AFT level (see above).  
Sound System – Set the sound system used for the  
current channel.  
Manual CH Setting  
Name – Move the cursor right then input a name for  
the current station, (up to five characters) then press  
ENTER.  
The channel skip function lets you skip channels where  
there is no station so that as you change channels using  
the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number buttons, you  
only change to channels that have a station.  
Decoder – If the current channel is scrambled,  
requiring a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO  
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector, set this  
to On. (See also AV2/L1 In on page 102.)  
The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune  
to stations, should you need to.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
5
6
Press ENTER to swap the presets.  
Channel Swapping  
The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel  
assignments of different programs. This is so that you  
can group together station presets which naturally go  
together.  
If you want to swap more presets, press ꢄ  
(cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5.  
7
Press HOME MENU to finish and exit.  
1
Select ‘Channel Swapping’.  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
• Default setting: n/a  
Initial Setup  
Guide channels are used by the VIDEO Plus+ system so  
that the channel number specified in the PlusCode  
programming numbers can be guaranteed to  
correspond to the correct station.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Auto Channel Setting  
Manual CH Setting  
Channel Swapping  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
Next Screen  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
1
Select ‘Set VIDEO Plus+ CH’, then ‘Next Screen’.  
2
Select ‘Next Screen’ to go to the swap presets  
Initial Setup  
screen.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Auto Channel Setting  
Manual CH Setting  
Channel Swapping  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
Next Screen  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Initial Setup  
[1]  
1/17  
CH Name  
[2]  
1/17  
CH Name  
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
System  
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
System  
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40  
I
I
I
I
I
I
CC40  
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
2
Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as  
necessary.  
Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers  
1
1
Swap Preset  
should be assigned to which guide channels.  
3
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to select  
Initial Setup  
a preset station to swap.  
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH  
1/26  
Auto C
• Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/  
next page.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Guide Preset  
Manua
Guide Preset  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Chann
Set VID
2
Pr 4  
1
6
7
3
4
5
8
9
10  
Initial Setup  
[1]  
1/17  
[2]  
1/17  
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
System  
CH Name  
CC40  
2
3
4
5
6
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
System  
CH Name  
CC40  
2
3
4
5
6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
• Use the ꢂ/ꢃ (cursor up/down) buttons to change  
the guide channel for setting.  
• Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to change  
the channel number.  
5
1
Swap Preset  
• Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/  
next 10 guide channels.  
4
Press (cursor right), then select a preset  
station to swap with the first preset.  
3
To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
[1]  
1/17  
[2]  
1/17  
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
System  
CH Name  
CC40  
2
3
4
5
6
Pr  
1
2
3
4
5
6
System  
CH Name  
CC40  
2
3
4
5
6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5
3
Swap Preset  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
Video In / Out settings  
13  
AV1 Out  
• Default setting: Video  
You only need to make this setting if you connected this  
recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV  
connector.  
Input Colour System  
• Default setting: Auto  
Important  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Input Colour System  
AV1 Out  
AV2/L1 In  
Next Screen  
• If you make a setting here that is incompatible with  
your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If  
this happens either switch everything off and  
reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video  
cable, or an S-video cable (see Using the S-video  
output on page 15 for more on this), or reset the  
recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 112 for  
how to do this).  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
NTSC on PAL TV  
On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects  
whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from  
one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or  
PAL–60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it  
manually if the picture is not displayed properly.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Input Colour System  
AV1 Out  
AV2/L1 In  
Video  
S-Video  
RGB  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
1
Select ‘Input Colour System’, then ‘Next Screen’.  
NTSC on PAL TV  
2
Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the INPUT  
SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner  
and the external inputs.  
Video – Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of  
the three AV settings.  
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to  
change the input colour system for the current input  
or built-in tuner.  
S-Video – Almost the same quality as RGB, but can  
give better results if you are using a long SCART  
cable.  
Pr 5  
RGB – If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the  
Auto  
best picture quality.  
• The available settings depend on the Input Line  
System setting (see Input Line System on page 98).  
The table below shows the different options available.  
AV2/L1 In  
• Default setting: Video  
You only need to make this setting if you connected this  
recorder to another component using the AV2/AUTO  
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector.  
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input  
625 System  
525 System  
Auto  
PAL  
Auto  
Initial Setup  
PAL  
Basic  
Tuner  
Input Colour System  
AV1 Out  
AV2/L1 In  
Video  
S-Video  
RGB  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
SECAM  
n/a  
SECAM  
Auto  
NTSC on PAL TV  
Decoder  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)  
connector input can be set to one of the following  
settings:  
Video – Sets the input signal type to composite  
video.  
S-Video – Sets the input signal type to S-video.  
• RGB – Sets the input signal type to RGB video.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Decoder – Use this setting if you are using a decoder  
connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/  
DECODER) input. (For scrambled channels, make  
sure that the manual channel Decoder setting is set  
to On—see also Manual CH Setting on page 100).  
Note that on this setting, it is not possible to use Auto  
Start Recording.  
Audio In settings  
NICAM Select  
• Default setting: NICAM  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
NICAM Select  
Tuner Level  
NICAM  
Regular Audio  
Note  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
External Audio  
Bilingual Recording  
DV Input  
Input Level (L1)  
Input Level (L2)  
• When the Input Line System setting is set to 525  
System, RGB can’t be selected.  
• When the Input Line System setting is set to 625  
System, RGB can be selected, but if the Input Line  
System is then changed to 525 System, the AV2/L1  
In setting automatically changes to Video.  
If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV  
broadcast, select Regular Audio, otherwise set to  
NICAM. (When set to NICAM, you can still select  
Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing  
audio channels on page 29.)  
• See also Input Line System on page 98.  
NTSC on PAL TV  
• Default setting: On  
Tuner Level  
• Default setting: Normal  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Input Colour System  
AV1 Out  
On  
Off  
Initial Setup  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
AV2/L1 In  
NTSC on PAL TV  
Basic  
Tuner  
NICAM Select  
Tuner Level  
External Audio  
Bilingual Recording  
DV Input  
Normal  
Compression  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Input Level (L1)  
Input Level (L2)  
When set to On, NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example)  
will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your  
TV is already NTSC-compatible.  
Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in  
tuner is excessively high causing distortion.  
Depending on this setting and the Input Line System  
setting (see Input Line System on page 98), the signal  
format output when the recorder is stopped varies as  
shown in the table below.  
External Audio  
• Default setting: Stereo  
Initial Setup  
NTSC on PAL  
TV  
Output when  
stopped  
Input Line System  
625 System  
Basic  
Tuner  
NICAM Select  
Tuner Level  
External Audio  
Bilingual Recording  
DV Input  
Stereo  
Bilingual  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PAL  
Input Level (L1)  
Input Level (L2)  
PAL  
525 System  
NTSC  
PAL–60  
If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to  
Stereo. If each channel carries a separate soundtrack,  
change to Bilingual.  
DVR-520H/720H only: When the external audio is from  
the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV  
audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or  
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
Note  
• Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly  
displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this  
setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if  
you’re not sure whether yours has this feature.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external  
input individually, from –6dB to +6dB in steps of 3 dB to  
optimize the recorded audio level.  
Bilingual Recording  
• Default setting: A/L  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
NICAM Select  
Tuner Level  
A/L  
B/R  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
External Audio  
Bilingual Recording  
DV Input  
Input Level (L1)  
Input Level (L2)  
Audio Out settings  
Digital Out  
• Default setting: On  
When recording a bilingual source from an external input  
in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32, or to the  
HDD, you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or  
the B/R (right) audio channel.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Digital Out  
On  
Off  
Tuner  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
96kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Note  
• If you’re recording in VR mode (except when set to  
FINE/MN32), both channels will be recorded and you  
can switch them as you like on playback.  
If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio  
output, set this to Off, otherwise leave it On.  
DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only)  
• Default setting: Stereo1  
Note  
You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/  
12-bit sound connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack.  
• When set to Off, all the other Audio Out settings are  
grayed out and can’t be set.  
Initial Setup  
Dolby Digital Out  
Basic  
Tuner  
NICAM Select  
Tuner Level  
External Audio  
Bilingual Recording  
DV Input  
Stereo1  
Stereo2  
Mix (Stereo1: 75%)  
Mix (Stereo1: 50%)  
Mix (Stereo1: 25%)  
You only need to make this setting if you connected this  
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using  
the digital output.  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Input Level (L1)  
Input Level (L2)  
• Default setting: Dolby Digital  
Initial Setup  
Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for  
audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other  
is for overdubbing after shooting.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Digital Out  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
96kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital PCM  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
On the Stereo1 setting, the sound that was recorded  
while shooting is used. On the Stereo2 setting, the  
overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a Mix  
setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a  
corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%.  
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)  
is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital,  
otherwise set to Dolby Digital PCM. Check the  
manual that came with the connected component if  
you’re unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible.  
Input Level (L1 / L2)  
• Default setting: 0dB  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
NICAM Select  
Tuner Level  
External Audio  
Bilingual Recording  
DV Input  
+6dB  
+3dB  
0dB  
3dB  
6dB  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Input Level (L1)  
Input Level (L2)  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
DTS Out  
MPEG Out  
You only need to make this setting if you connected this  
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using  
the digital output.  
You only need to make this setting if you connected this  
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using  
the digital output.  
• Default setting: On  
• Default setting: MPEG PCM  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Digital Out  
Basic  
Digital Out  
On  
MPEG  
Tuner  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
96kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
Tuner  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
96kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
Off  
MPEG PCM  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)  
has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On, otherwise set to  
Off. Check the manual that came with the connected  
component if you’re unsure whether it is DTS  
compatible.  
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)  
is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG, otherwise set to  
MPEG PCM. Check the manual that came with the  
connected component if you’re unsure whether it is  
MPEG compatible.  
Important  
• If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/  
receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS  
disc.  
Language settings  
OSD Language  
• Default setting: English  
• When set to On, there is no analog audio output  
when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc.  
• When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out  
is Off), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do  
not play this through your amplifier and speakers.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
OSD Language  
English  
Français  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Español  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Auto Language  
DVD Menu Language  
Subtitle Display  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
• When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that  
Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See  
Switching audio channels on page 44.  
96kHz PCM Out  
This sets the language of the on-screen menus and  
displays.  
You only need to make this setting if you connected this  
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using  
the digital output.  
Audio Language  
• Default setting: English  
• Default setting: 96kHz 48kHz  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Digital Out  
Dolby Digital Out  
DTS Out  
96kHz PCM Out  
MPEG Out  
96kHz 48kHz  
96kHz  
Basic  
Tuner  
OSD Language  
English  
French  
German  
Italian  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Auto Language  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
DVD Menu Language  
Subtitle Display  
Spanish  
Other  
If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)  
is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96  
kHz), set to 96kHz, otherwise set to 96kHz 48kHz.  
Check the manual that came with the connected  
component if you’re unsure whether it is compatible with  
high sampling rate audio.  
This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD  
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a  
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that  
language (although this depends on the Auto Language  
setting—see Auto Language on page 106).  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other  
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on  
page 107).  
Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly  
according to your Audio Language and Subtitle  
Language settings.  
For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and  
Subtitle Language settings must be the same—see  
Audio Language on page 105 and Subtitle Language  
above.  
Tip  
• You can switch between the languages recorded on  
a DVD disc any time during playback using the  
AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.)  
Note  
• Even when set to On, Auto Language may not work  
with some discs. In this case, set the audio and  
subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE  
buttons.  
Subtitle Language  
• Default setting: English  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
OSD Language  
English  
French  
German  
Italian  
Spanish  
Other  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Auto Language  
DVD Menu Language  
Subtitle Display  
Tip  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
• You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on  
playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons.  
DVD Menu Language  
This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD  
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a  
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those  
subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language  
setting—see Auto Language below).  
• Default setting: w/Subtitle Language  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD Language  
w/Subtitle Language  
English  
French  
German  
Italian  
Tuner  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Auto Language  
DVD Menu Language  
Subtitle Display  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other  
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on  
page 107).  
Spanish  
Other  
Tip  
Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several  
languages. This setting specifies in which language the  
disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting  
for menus to appear in the same language as your  
Subtitle Language—see Subtitle Language above.  
• You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD  
disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE  
button. (This does not affect this setting.)  
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other  
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on  
page 107).  
Auto Language  
• Default setting: On  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD Language  
On  
Tuner  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Auto Language  
DVD Menu Language  
Subtitle Display  
Off  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
When set to On, the recorder selects the default audio  
language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French  
movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your  
preferred subtitle language only if that is set to  
something different. In other words, movies in your native  
language won’t have any subtitles, while foreign  
language movies will be shown with subtitles.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Subtitle Display  
• Default setting: On  
Recording settings  
Initial Setup  
Manual Recording  
Basic  
Tuner  
OSD Language  
On  
Off  
Audio Language  
Subtitle Language  
Auto Language  
DVD Menu Language  
Subtitle Display  
• Default setting: Off  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Assist Subtitle  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Manual Recording  
Optimized Rec  
On (go to setup)  
Off  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Navi Mark  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
Frame Accurate  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
When set to On, the recorder displays subtitles  
according to the Subtitle Language and Auto  
Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off  
altogether (although you may find that some discs  
override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the  
recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on  
to some DVD discs.  
On the default setting there are four different recording  
time/picture quality settings, FINE, SP, LP and EP. If you  
want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual  
Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings.  
When recording, you can select your Manual Recording  
setting using the REC MODE button.  
Selecting ‘Other’ languages  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the language list.  
1
Select ‘On (go to setup)’ to display the manual  
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu  
recording setting screen.  
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.  
Pr 5  
DVD Remain 2h00m  
2
Select the language you want.  
HDD Remain 30h33m  
EP  
LP  
SP  
FINE  
Initial Setup  
DVD Menu Language  
OSD La
Basic  
Tuner  
MN 9(4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps  
Preview  
Audio
Subtitl
Language  
English  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Auto L
DVD M
Subtitl
Number  
0
5
1
4
2
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to  
change the manual recording level.  
• You can also use the and buttons to cycle  
between levels MN1, MN9, MN21 and MN32.  
• Select by language name: Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/  
• To preview the recording quality, press (cursor  
down) and select Preview. To return to the level  
adjust screen, press ENTER.  
right) buttons to change the language.  
• Select by code number: Press (cursor down) then  
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit  
language code.  
3
Press ENTER to set the manual recording level  
and return to the menu screen.  
See Language code list on page 119 for a list of available  
languages and corresponding codes.  
Note  
3
Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.  
• The preset picture quality settings correspond to the  
following manual settings: FINE: MN32, SP: MN21,  
LP: MN9, EP: MN1.  
• See Manual recording modes on page 118 for  
detailed information on the manual recording levels.  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
Optimized Rec  
• Default setting: Off  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
• Default setting: 10 minutes  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Manual Recording  
Optimized Rec  
Basic  
Tuner  
Manual Recording  
Optimized Rec  
On  
Off  
No Separation  
10 minutes  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Navi Mark  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Navi Mark  
15 minutes  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
Frame Accurate  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
Frame Accurate  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy  
or VIDEO Plus+ programming system) is set but there  
isn’t enough space on the disc at the recording quality  
set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the  
disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder  
automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the  
available disc space.  
When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started  
every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change  
this interval to 15 minutes, or switch off automatic  
chapter marking altogether with the No Separation  
setting.  
Frame Accurate  
• Default setting: Off  
Note  
Initial Setup  
• You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the  
recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the  
remaining time available on the disc.  
Basic  
Tuner  
Manual Recording  
Optimized Rec  
On  
Off  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Navi Mark  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
Frame Accurate  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
• If, even on recording level MN 1, there is insufficient  
space available on the disc, the recording is made on  
the HDD at the quality setting you originally  
specified.  
When Frame Accurate setting is Off, exact frame  
accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when  
recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate On to  
preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying  
some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time.  
• Optimized Recording only compensates for the first  
(earliest starting) timer program if more than one has  
been set.  
• Optimized recording works only with DVD  
recordings.  
• Optimized recording can’t be used together with  
VPS/PDC.  
Important  
• When you change this setting the Copy List is erased.  
Make sure it is set how you want it before you start  
putting together a Copy List.  
Navi Mark  
• Default setting: 0 seconds  
• The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the  
actual video content stored on the HDD.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Manual Recording  
Optimized Rec  
Navi Mark  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
Frame Accurate  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
0 seconds  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
• Default setting: VR Mode  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder  
automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to  
initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording.  
In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still  
frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets  
you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0  
seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also  
set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title  
is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used).  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Manual Recording  
Optimized Rec  
VR Mode  
Video Mode  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Navi Mark  
Auto Chapter (Video)  
Frame Accurate  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
Playback settings  
13  
Seamless Playback  
VR mode  
HDD  
• Default setting: Off  
TV Screen Size  
During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice  
momentary interruption in the picture at edited points.  
The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off  
accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback.  
When switched On, you may notice that the edit points  
are a few frames earlier or later than you set.  
• Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box)  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
On  
Off  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 setting—  
widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full  
screen area. When playing software recorded in  
conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will  
determine how the material is presented—see the  
manual that came with your TV for details on what  
options are available.  
Parental Lock  
• Default level: Off  
If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter  
Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan). In Letter Box mode,  
• Default password: none  
• Default Country code: us (2119)  
widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top  
and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off  
widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even  
though the picture looks larger on the screen, you’re  
actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and  
disc formats on page 113 for more information.  
Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If  
the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will  
require you to enter a password before the disc will play.  
This gives you some control about what your children  
watch on your DVD recorder.  
Some discs also support the Country code feature. The  
recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs  
depending on the Country code you set.  
Still Picture  
• Default setting: Auto  
Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country  
code you must set a password. As the password owner  
you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code  
whenever you like. You can also change the password.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
Field  
Frame  
Auto  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Note  
• Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for  
your children use the Parental Lock feature. These  
discs will always play without requiring the password  
first.  
The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying  
a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting  
automatically chooses the best setting each time.  
• If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder  
to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 112), then set a new password.  
Field – produces a stable, generally shake-free  
image.  
Frame – produces a sharper image, but more prone  
to shake than field stills.  
Parental Lock : Set Password  
The password you set will enable you to change the  
Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the  
password that you will need to enter if you want to play a  
disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
1
Select ‘Set Password’.  
5
Press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
Parental Lock : Change Level  
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
Set Password  
Change Level  
Country Code  
1
Select ‘Change Level’.  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
Change Password  
Change Level  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
Country Code  
2
Use the number buttons to input a four-digit  
password.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
2
Use number buttons to enter your password,  
Set Password  
TV Sc
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
then press ENTER.  
1
2
3
4
Initial Setup  
TV ScParental Lock : Change Level  
Basic  
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
Tuner  
1
2
3
4
Password  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
3
Press ENTER to set the password.  
Off  
Parental Lock : Change Password  
To change your password, confirm your existing  
password then enter a new one.  
3
Use the ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) buttons to select  
a new parental lock level.  
1
Select ‘Change Password’.  
Initial Setup  
Initial Setup  
Parental Lock : Change Level  
TV Sc
Basic  
Tuner  
Still P
Seam
Paren
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
1
Change Password  
Change Level  
Country Code  
2
3
4
Password  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Angle
Off  
4
Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level.  
2
Use the number buttons to enter your existing  
password.  
Parental Lock : Country Code  
You may also want to refer to the Country code list on  
page 119.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
TV Sc
Still P
Seam
C
h
a
n
ge Password  
1
Select ‘Country Code’.  
Current Password  
1
2
3
4
Paren
Angle
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
New Password  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Tuner  
TV Screen Size  
Still Picture  
Change Password  
Change Level  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
Country Code  
3
4
Press ENTER.  
Enter a new password.  
Initial Setup  
Change Password  
TV Sc
Still P
Basic  
Tuner  
Seam
Paren
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Current Password  
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Angle
New Password  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
13  
2
Use number buttons to enter your password,  
On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc  
that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on-  
screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching  
is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen  
indicator.  
then press ENTER.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
Parental Lock: Country Code  
TV Sc
Tuner  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Still P
Seam
Paren
Angle
1
2
3
4
9
Password  
us  
Code  
2
1
1
Number  
3
Select a Country code.  
There are two ways you can do this.  
• Select by code letter: Use ꢄ/ꢅ (cursor left/right) to  
change the country code.  
Initial Setup  
Parental Lock: Country Code  
TV Sc
Basic  
Tuner  
Still P
Seam
Paren
1
2
3
4
9
Password  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Angle
us  
Code  
Number  
2
1
1
• Select by code number: Press (cursor down) then  
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit  
country code (you can find the Country code list on  
page 119.)  
Initial Setup  
Parental Lock: Country Code  
TV Sc
Basic  
Still P
Seam
Paren
Tuner  
1
2
3
4
9
Password  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Angle
us  
Code  
2
1
1
Number  
4
Press ENTER to set the new Country code.  
Note  
• Changing the country code does not take effect until  
the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is  
reloaded).  
Angle Indicator  
• Default setting: On  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
TV Screen Size  
On  
Tuner  
Still Picture  
Off  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
Seamless Playback  
Parental Lock  
Angle Indicator  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Chapter 14  
Additional information  
Maker  
Code  
66  
Resetting the recorder  
Alba  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory  
settings.  
Bush  
76  
Finlux  
84  
1
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
Fisher  
61, 65  
77  
2
ON.  
Press and hold STOP and press STANDBY/  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
67  
Goldstar  
Grandiente  
Grundig  
Hitachi  
ITT  
79  
87  
Setting up the remote to control your  
TV  
51, 82  
56, 60, 83, 86  
70  
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be  
able to use this feature you first have to program the  
remote with a maker code from the table below.  
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then  
Mitsubishi  
Nokia  
59  
enter the maker code for your TV.  
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights.  
53, 81  
58, 72  
57, 85  
50, 80  
68  
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is  
more than one code given for your make, input the first  
one in the list.  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
RCA  
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the  
table below, you will not be able to use this remote to  
control your TV.  
Salora  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
71  
2
Press TV to check that the remote works with  
your TV.  
73, 75  
74  
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/  
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your  
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.  
Sei  
78  
Sharp  
52  
Using the TV remote control buttons  
The table below shows how to use this remote control  
with your TV.  
Sony  
54  
Tandy  
69  
Button  
What it does  
Telefunken  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
Victor  
64  
TV  
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)  
62  
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input  
TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume  
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels  
55  
63  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9  
The program is shown in  
widescreen with black bars at  
the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
The sides of the program are  
cropped so that the picture  
fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
The program appears  
squashed. Set to either 4:3  
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &  
Scan).  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The program is presented  
correctly on either setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
16:9  
The program is presented in  
widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the  
picture is presented—check  
the manual that came with the  
TV for details.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
14  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this  
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the  
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the  
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The disc is automatically ejected  
after closing the disc tray  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format  
disc (page 9).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 121).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 123).  
No picture  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct  
input.  
Can’t play a disc  
• Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format  
disc (page 9).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 121).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so  
for the condensation to evaporate.  
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System  
different to the current recorder setting.  
All settings are reset  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,  
all the settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the  
power cord.  
Screen goes blank and controls are • Press STOP then restart playback.  
inoperative  
Remote control does not work  
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL  
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 99). (When  
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).  
• Replace the batteries (page 8).  
No sound or sound is distorted  
• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume  
turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow  
motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.  
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or  
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make  
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On.  
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,  
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.  
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot  
is distorted  
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Problem  
Remedy  
The picture is distorted  
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 98). (You can also change it by  
pressing the + button and DVD on the front panel simultaneously with the  
recorder stopped.)  
Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 109) is correct for the kind of TV  
zontally  
you have (see also page 113).  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the  
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1  
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio  
(standard) video.  
Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 59).  
recorder on another player  
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video  
mode and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW  
compatible in order to play it (page 9).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM  
compatible players (page 46).  
During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display  
or distorted  
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Can’t control your TV using this  
remote control  
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn  
(page 112).  
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of  
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.  
Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
cessfully  
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.  
• The HDD may contain up to 250 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999  
chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached.  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 92).  
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the  
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV  
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line  
System setting to match what you want to record (page 98).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV  
cessfully  
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected  
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material  
(page 46).  
Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will  
record completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from  
power failure the front panel dis-  
play shows ‘--:--’  
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last  
approximately five years from factory shipping.  
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the  
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.  
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’  
when a button is pressed  
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55).  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Problem  
Remedy  
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for  
DVD)  
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a  
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One  
Touch Copy will not work.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than  
HDD)  
250 titles on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.  
The picture freezes and the front  
panel and remote control buttons  
stop working  
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then  
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold  
STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the  
material in SP (or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one  
disc (note that there will be some loss in picture  
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked  
quality if you do this).  
Frequently asked questions  
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it  
can do.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 61.  
• How do I make a high-quality copy?  
• Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping  
both audio channels and switch them on playback?  
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy  
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,  
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared  
to the original.  
No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual  
Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be  
recorded. If you need to record both channels of  
audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc.  
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a  
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we  
recommend that you change the recording mode to  
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the  
available space on the disc.  
See also Bilingual Recording on page 104.  
• Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than  
six hours?  
See also Copying and back-up on page 61.  
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for  
up to 24 hours. However, because the maximum  
length of a title is six hours, the recording will be  
spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be  
a short break in the recording between titles.  
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had  
the commercials edited out?  
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit  
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to  
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out  
the commercials, then record that to DVD.  
See also Setting a timer recording on page 49.  
See also Copying and back-up on page 61.  
• Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-  
RW) to the HDD?  
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in FINE  
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?  
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the  
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing  
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc  
as you want to copy.  
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of FINE  
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a  
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could  
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of  
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using  
See also One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62.  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?  
• Audio output from the DV IN/OUT jack is 16-bit only.  
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD  
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-  
RW.  
• Audio input to the DV IN/OUT jack should be 32 or  
48kHz (not 44.1kHz).  
• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the  
source component pauses playback or plays an  
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable becomes  
disconnected.  
See also Copying from DVD to HDD* on page 71.  
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a  
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from  
the HDD?  
DV-related messages  
You may see the following messages appear on your TV  
screen when using the DV IN/OUT jack.  
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR  
mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the  
recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles  
if the whole recording won’t fit on to one disc.  
No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is  
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched  
off.  
See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63.  
The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is  
recording, so you cannot start recording from the  
camcorder to this recorder.  
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another  
DVD player?  
Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video  
mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on  
any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that  
some players will not play some recordable media.  
You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this  
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.  
No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no  
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.  
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW  
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.  
The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The  
camcorder is in record-pause mode.  
DV camcorder playback canceled.  
Recording has been paused. – Recording was  
paused because the camcorder is not in playback  
mode.  
About DV (DVR-520H/720H only)  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-  
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV  
cable for input and output of audio, video, data and  
control signals.  
Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder  
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the  
camcorder then switching it back on.  
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.  
Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This  
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format  
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and  
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.  
Recording has stopped because the recorded  
material on the tape finished. – When the recorded  
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder  
automatically stops recording.  
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at  
a time to this recorder.  
Recording has stopped because DV camcorder  
playback stopped. – Recording stopped because  
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the  
camcorder was disconnected.  
• You cannot control this recorder from external  
equipment connected via the DV IN/OUT jack.  
• It may not always be possible to control the  
connected camcorder via the DV IN/OUT jack.  
The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please  
select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The  
camcorder is in camera mode.  
• This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video  
from the DV IN/OUT jack; signals from the built-in TV  
tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output.  
• Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from  
the DV IN/OUT jack.  
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as  
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/  
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo  
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see  
DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104).  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
14  
The table below shows the approximate recording times  
for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the  
standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated  
by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in  
picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the  
same as those for Video mode.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in  
Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in  
Linear PCM format.  
Video mode /  
VR mode  
HDD  
Level  
Rec. time  
Level  
Rec. time  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
MN 7  
MN 8  
360 mins.  
345 mins.  
330 mins.  
315 mins.  
300 mins.  
285 mins.  
270 mins.  
255 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
EP  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
MN 6  
MN 7  
MN 8  
360 mins.  
345 mins.  
330 mins.  
315 mins.  
300 mins.  
285 mins.  
270 mins.  
255 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
MN 9  
LP  
MN 9  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
SP  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins. FINE MN 32  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Laothian (lo), 1215  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Country code list  
Country, Country code, Country code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702, gb  
USA, 2119, us  
China, 0314, cn  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr  
Russian Federation, 1821, ru  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
On-screen displays and recorder displays  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation  
of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically  
initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the  
recorder and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for file management data.  
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum  
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/  
chapters or combine chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-  
ization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the  
finalization in order to recording/editing.  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
• Could not record the information to the disc.  
• Cannot edit.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and  
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even  
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or some other  
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is  
dirty or damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-  
patible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-RW  
disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using Video mode  
recording.  
• This content is copy protected.  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder  
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.  
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual  
Recording] setting.  
When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR  
mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. You  
can only record the left or right channel; not both.  
• Repairing disc.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when  
the power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The  
contents of the recording will be lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation.  
Press DISPLAY to clear this message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the  
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a  
Pioneer authorized service center.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may  
cordable.  
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected  
camcorder. (Applicable to DVR-520H/720H only.)  
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input  
or the input signal is unrecordable.  
• This channel’s TV system is different from the  
recorder’s setting.  
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different  
from the TV system settings of this recorder.  
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel  
Press DISPLAY to clear message. set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.  
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,  
different than the recording.  
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to  
stop automatically.  
Handling discs  
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave  
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold  
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.  
For more detailed care information see the instructions  
that come with discs.  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and  
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.  
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the  
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the  
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc  
becoming unusable.  
Damaged discs  
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,  
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly  
from the center to the outside edge as shown in the  
diagram below.  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can  
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise  
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging  
the recorder.  
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully  
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not  
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all  
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped  
discs.  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a  
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a  
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or  
other cleaning agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
Storing discs  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl  
records, you should still take care to handle and store  
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to  
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in  
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including  
under direct sunlight).  
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a  
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing  
instrument. These could all damage the disc.  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
14  
Moving the recorder  
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in  
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction  
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD  
players are commercially available, we do not re-  
commend using them since some may damage the lens.  
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if  
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press ꢃ  
STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking  
that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.  
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power  
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or  
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be  
damaged.  
Condensation  
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is  
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the  
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the  
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you  
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for  
about an hour before switching on and using.  
Glossary  
Analog audio  
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.  
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical  
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See  
also Digital audio.  
Aspect ratio  
Hints on installation  
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.  
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is  
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen  
is almost twice as wide as it is high).  
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so  
please bear in mind the following points when choosing  
a suitable location for it:  
Do...  
Chapter  
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on  
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See  
also Title.  
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,  
shelf or stereo rack.  
Don’t...  
Digital audio  
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or  
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During  
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals  
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-  
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On  
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an  
analog signal based on these numbers. See also  
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.  
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-  
generating appliances.  
Place on a window sill or other place where the  
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room  
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other  
Dolby Digital  
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in  
use.  
1
With multichannel audio, this high quality surround  
system is used in many movie theaters around the world.  
Use near a television or monitor as you may  
experience interference—especially if the television uses  
an indoor antenna.  
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder  
may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this  
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large  
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
DRM (Digital Rights Management)  
MPEG audio  
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a  
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by  
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the  
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record  
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction  
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other  
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.  
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD  
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format  
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV  
amp/receivers. See also PCM.  
MPEG video  
DTS  
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD  
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the  
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.  
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround  
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a  
popular surround sound format for movies.  
Optical digital output  
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light  
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks  
using a special optical cord, available from specialist  
audio dealers.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
Dynamic range  
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)  
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds  
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting  
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are  
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic  
cinema-like effects.  
The most common system of encoding digital audio,  
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a  
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital  
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio  
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with  
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and  
MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.  
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)  
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still  
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers  
use this compressed file format which carries date, time  
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.  
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)  
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through  
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good  
for discs that you would normally not watch from  
File extension  
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type  
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.  
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.  
Regions (DVD only)  
ALL  
2
(example region code marks)  
ISO 9660 format  
International standard for the volume and file structure of  
CD-ROM discs.  
Regions associate discs and players with particular  
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have  
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of  
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are  
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).  
JPEG  
A file format used for still images, such as photographs  
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file  
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this  
format.  
Sampling frequency  
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into  
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the  
sound quality, but the more digital information is  
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency  
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples  
MP3  
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file  
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”  
or “.MP3”.  
(measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Title  
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also  
Chapter.  
Track  
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the  
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.  
See also Chapter.  
WMA  
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an  
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft  
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using  
Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media  
Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file  
extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.  
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are  
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
14  
Tuner  
Receivable channels  
PAL B/G  
PAL I  
Frequency  
Frequency  
Channel  
Channel  
General  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
47 - 89 MHz  
E2 - E4  
X - Z  
44 - 89 MHz  
A - C  
X - Z  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,  
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD,  
104 - 300 MHz  
E5 - E12  
S1 - S20  
M1 - M10  
U1 - U10  
104 - 300 MHz  
D - J  
11, 13  
S1 - S20  
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)  
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
Power consumption  
DVR-420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 W  
DVR-520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W  
DVR-720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 W  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
E21 - E69  
302 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
E21 - E69  
SECAM L  
Frequency  
SECAM D/K  
Frequency  
Channel  
Channel  
Power consumption in standby mode  
0.68 W  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
49 - 65 MHz  
2 - 4  
49 - 94 MHz  
R1 - R5  
(Front panel display: off /Power Save Mode2)  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 kg  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm  
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C  
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%  
(no condensation)  
104 - 300 MHz  
5 - 10  
B - Q  
104 - 300 MHz  
R6 - R12  
S1 - S20  
Hyper  
UHF  
300 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
21 - 69  
302 - 470 MHz  
470 - 862 MHz  
S21 - S41  
E21 - E69  
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/  
NTSC (external input only)  
Recording  
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording  
DVD-VIDEO  
STEREO  
B/G - A2  
I - NICAM  
L - NICAM  
B/G - NICAM  
D/K - NICAM  
Recordable discs  
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)  
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)  
Timer  
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)  
Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz  
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG  
Audio recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz  
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set  
75 (IEC connector)  
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),  
RCA jack (Input 2)  
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output  
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 1 (AV1)  
RCA jack (Output)  
Recording time  
HDD—DVR-720H  
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34–204 hours  
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)  
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),  
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2)  
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 / Output  
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )  
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 )  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),  
4 pin mini DIN (Output)  
HDD—DVR-420H/520H  
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17–102 hours  
DVD-R/DVD-RW  
Fine (FINE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour  
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours  
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–6 hours  
RGB input  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1)  
RGB output  
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 1 (AV1)  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
14  
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R  
Input level  
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),  
RCA jacks (Input 2)  
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1 Output  
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),  
RCA jacks (Output)  
Control input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack  
DV input/output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4pin  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)  
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector  
This connector provides the video and audio signals for  
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.  
PIN no.  
AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)  
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out  
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in  
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in  
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out  
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in  
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in  
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in  
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out  
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in  
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status  
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND  
Supplied accessories  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Warranty card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Operating Instructions  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject  
to change without notice, due to improvement.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
15  
Index  
A
O
Adjusting the picture quality 94–96  
Audio DRC 96  
One Touch Copy 6, 21, 23, 61, 62–63, 116  
One Touch Recording 7, 48  
Audio language 23, 43, 105  
Audio settings 103–105  
Auto language 105, 106  
Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup  
Automatic channel setup 25, 99  
AV amplifier (connecting to) 19, 27  
AV connector 12, 14–18, 98, 100, 102, 126  
On-screen display (OSD) 33, 105  
Optimized recording 7, 52, 65, 107, 116  
Original content 7, 11, 23, 34, 76, 78, 79–83, 87  
OSD - see On-screen display (OSD)  
P
PAL 45, 46, 98, 99, 102, 103  
PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD) 32, 36, 123  
PhotoViewer 90–91  
B
Bilingual audio 22, 29, 44, 46, 48, 103, 104, 116  
Picture quality - see Adjusting the picture quality  
and Recording quality  
Play List 7, 11, 22, 23, 34, 76, 79, 84–88  
Play Mode menu 23, 40–42  
Program play 41, 41–42  
C
Camcorder - see DV camcorder  
Changing TV channels 29, 112  
Chase play - see Simultaneous recording and playback  
Copy List 63–74, 108, 116  
CPRM 46, 120  
R
Recording 6–7, 28, 35, 45–60  
Recording quality 46, 47, 94  
Recovery recording 7, 49  
Remote control 8, 23, 99  
Repeat play 41, 42  
D
Disc and file formats 9, 113  
Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats  
Disc Navigator 36–37, 76–88, 108  
Dolby Digital 6, 27, 43, 44, 46, 96, 104, 122  
Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25, 100  
DV camcorder 7, 20, 57, 58, 117  
Rotating (a JPEG picture) 91  
S
Scanning 24, 38  
SCART - see AV connector  
SECAM 45, 46, 98, 99, 102  
Setting up 25–27, 112  
Simultaneous recording and playback 6, 35, 55  
Slow motion playback 39  
Subtitle langauge 23, 43, 106  
E
Easy Timer Recording 6, 50  
Editing recordings 76–88  
F
Finalizing discs 34, 59, 93  
T
I
Timer recording 6, 13, 17, 22, 24, 35, 49–55, 56  
TV aspect ratio 108, 113  
Initializing discs 45, 60, 93, 108  
Input colour system 98, 102  
Input line system 98, 102, 103  
TV audio channel 29, 48, 103, 104  
TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system  
J
V
JPEG picture files 7, 10, 35, 90–91, 123  
Video mode 7, 9, 10, 22, 35, 45, 59, 60, 62, 93, 108,  
116, 118  
M
VIDEO Plus+ 6, 23, 52–53, 101  
Video settings 94–96, 102–103  
VPS/PDC 6, 22, 49, 51, 52, 55  
VR mode 10, 22, 45, 48, 59, 60, 62, 79, 84, 93, 108,  
109, 117, 118  
Manual channel setup 100  
Manual recording mode (MN) 22, 47, 107, 118  
MP3 audio 7, 9, 32, 123  
MPEG audio 12, 105, 123  
N
W
NICAM audio 29, 103  
WMA audio 7, 9, 32, 124  
NTSC 22, 45, 46, 95, 96, 98, 102, 103  
Z
Zooming (a JPEG picture) 91  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2004 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_A_En  
Printed in the UK  
<VRB1340-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Peerless Industries Projector Accessories PRS EXA S W User Manual
Pfaff Sewing Machine Embroidery Mode Stitch Out User Manual
Philips CRT Television Television TV User Manual
Philips Power Supply 3R12LS1A User Manual
Philips Work Light LP 11 User Manual
Plantronics Headphones H141 User Manual
Porter Cable Planer PC305TP User Manual
Powermate Portable Generator PL0545008 User Manual
Pride Mobility Mobility Aid INFMANU4206 User Manual
ProForm Home Gym 831150320 User Manual